JP2019154894A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent performance effects from decreasing.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: volume adjustment operation means (for example, an upward direction depressing operation part 130a and a downward direction depressing operation part 130b of a cross key 130) for adjusting volume; and brightness adjustment operation means (for example, a left direction depressing operation part 130c and a right direction operation part 130d of the cross key 130) for adjusting volume. The game machine can perform processing to adjust brightness on the basis of operation of the volume adjustment operation means and perform processing to adjust brightness on the basis of operation of the brightness adjustment operation means. When operation reducing volume by the volume adjustment operation means and operation increasing brightness by the brightness adjustment operation means are performed, the processing to reduce volume is preferentially performed. When operation to reduce brightness by the brightness adjustment operation means and operation to increase volume by the volume adjustment operation means are performed, the processing to reduce brightness is preferentially executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who easily wins a ball or an advantageous state for a player. It is to generate a right and to be in a state where conditions for paying out a prize ball are easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Some of such gaming machines are configured to include volume adjustment operation means for adjusting volume and brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting brightness. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that volume adjustment is performed by operating the cross direction controller to the left or right, and brightness adjustment is performed by operating the cross direction controller upward or downward. Further, it is described that when both an operation for adjusting the volume and an operation for adjusting the brightness are detected at the same time, both the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are controlled to be impossible.

JP-A-2006-147020

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the operation by the volume adjustment operation means and the operation by the brightness adjustment operation means are performed, the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not executed. May decrease.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the effect of the performance from decreasing.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, the upward pressing operation portion 130a of the cross key 130 and the downward direction). Volume adjustment based on operations on the operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation unit And adjusting means (for example, a part for executing step S800A in the production control microcomputer 100) capable of executing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. Priority is given to volume reduction processing when an operation to lower the volume by the volume adjustment operation means and an operation to increase the brightness by the brightness adjustment operation means are performed. (For example, a part for executing steps S4009 and S4010 in the production control microcomputer 100; see processing at timing T1 shown in FIG. 20), and further detecting means (for example, push sensor) capable of detecting the player's action 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.), promotion display executing means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203) and the like, which are capable of executing the promotion display for encouraging the player's operation, and detection means Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character effect effect, etc.) based on the detection result, and the specific effect executing means is at least a first specific effect. (For example, the first character role action effect etc.) is different from the first specific effect. A second specific effect (for example, a second character accessory action effect or the like) can be executed, and the promotion display executing means uses a first promotion display (indicating that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display). For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the button display 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905, and the second specific effect is suggested. 2 promotion display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905) can be executed. . According to such a structure, it can prevent that a production effect falls. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of game production.

(Means 2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit of the cross key 130). 130a and the downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation unit. Adjustment means (for example, a part for executing step S800A in the production control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process for performing volume adjustment based on the operation and a process for performing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. The adjusting means is a process for reducing the brightness when an operation for decreasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means and an operation for increasing the volume by the volume adjusting operation means are performed. Preferentially executed (for example, a part for executing steps S4011, S4012 in the production control microcomputer 100; see processing at timing T2 shown in FIG. 20), and further detecting means (for example, detecting the player's action) , Push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and promotion display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 and a controller image 90203) capable of executing a promotion display for encouraging the player's operation. Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character role effect, etc.) based on the detection result of the detection means, and the specific effect executing means is at least 1 specific performance (for example, the first character role action performance) and the first specific performance A second specific effect (for example, a second character accessory action effect or the like) different from the above can be executed, and the promotion display execution means suggests that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display. Promotion display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905) and the second specific effect are executed. Second suggestion display to suggest (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905) can be executed. Features. According to such a structure, it can prevent that a production effect falls. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of game production.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the adjusting means is either volume or brightness when an operation for increasing the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation for increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. Priority is given to the process of raising either one (for example, as shown in Modification A, when a brightness-up operation and a volume-up operation are performed at the same time, one of the volume and the brightness is determined in advance. It may be configured such that the setting level is raised with priority given to the other). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the volume and brightness.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the adjusting means adjusts the volume and the brightness when an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. (E.g., as shown in Modification B, when a brightness down operation and a volume down operation are performed at the same time, either the volume or the brightness is reduced). It may be configured such that one of the predetermined ones is given priority and the setting level is lowered. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the volume and brightness.

(Means 5) In the means 1 or 2, the adjusting means is an effect stage of the volume and the brightness when an operation for increasing the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation for increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. The process of raising the lower one is preferentially executed (for example, the part for executing steps S4013 to S4016 in the production control microcomputer 100; see the processes at timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). Also good. According to such a structure, it can prevent that a production effect falls.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1, means 2 or means 5, the adjusting means performs an operation of lowering the sound volume by the sound volume adjusting operation means and an operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means. Priority is given to the process of lowering the higher production stage of volume and brightness (for example, the part for executing steps S4017 to S4019 in the production control microcomputer 100. See the processes at timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20). .) May be configured as follows. According to such a structure, it can prevent that a production effect falls.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the adjustment means is executed before the operation is performed when the operation by the volume adjustment operation means and the operation by the brightness adjustment operation means are performed. Based on the effect, priority is given to the process of adjusting either one of the volume and the brightness (for example, steps S4005 to S4008 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed, and the speech advance notice effect is executed immediately before. If so, the sound volume adjustment may be performed with priority, and if the flash notice effect is performed immediately before, the brightness adjustment may be performed with priority). According to such a structure, it can prevent that a production effect falls.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the detection means (for example, the first push button and the second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the player's action, and the detection means Can execute a specific effect (for example, a part for updating the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated strokes toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated strokes) by the player. Specific effect executing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the notice effect processing and the big hit game processing), and the detecting means is the first detecting means (for example, the second detecting means). Including a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means. The line means can execute the specific effect on the assumption that the predetermined operation is executed based on a specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation by the player (for example, in the second embodiment) The effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect process and the big hit game process, and updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits toward the final mode by automatic repeated hits), both in the first detecting means and the second detecting means. When the predetermined operation is detected, the specific effect can be executed any longer than when the predetermined operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 The value of the counter of the number of consecutive hits is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the first push button is operated in S361 of the notice effect process and when it is determined that the second push button is operated in S368. Portion, or a portion in which the value of the counter for the number of consecutive hits is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the first push button is operated in S441 of the big hit game processing and when the second push button is operated in S448), the first When a specific action is detected by both the detection means and the second detection means (for example, the first control for determining that the first push button has been pressed and the second flag in the presentation control CPU 101 at S373 of the notice effect process or S453 of the big hit process) When it is determined that the push button long press determination flag is set), the specific effect is executed with the same speed as when the specific operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Yes (for example, the flag for determining that the first push button is being pressed is determined in step S373 of the notice effect process or the process S453 of the big hit game by the effect control CPU 101) And when it determines with the 2nd push button long press determination flag being set, and it determines with the 1st push button long press determination flag being set in S374 of notice effect processing, or S454 of jackpot game processing In this case, when it is determined that the second push button long-pressing determination flag is set in S375 of the notice effect process or S455 of the big hit game, the value of the automatic repeated hit counter is incremented by 1). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the detection means (for example, the first push button and the second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the player's action, and the detection means Can execute a specific effect (for example, a part for updating the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated strokes toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated strokes) by the player. Specific effect executing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the notice effect processing and the big hit game processing), and the detecting means is the first detecting means (for example, the second detecting means). Including a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means. The line means can execute the specific effect on the assumption that the predetermined operation is executed based on a specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation by the player (for example, in the second embodiment) The effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect process and the big hit game process, and updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits toward the final mode by automatic repeated hits), when the specific operation is detected by the first detecting means When the specific action is detected by the second detection means, the same effect can be executed with the same speed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27B, when the player presses and holds the first push button for a long time) And the case where the second push button is pressed for a long time, the long press determination period is the same 0.2 seconds, so that the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits can be updated toward the final mode at the same speed It may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, the detection means (for example, the first push button and the second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the player's action, and the detection means Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 second which is the long press determination interval), the specific effect (for example, the display mode of the meter corresponding to the continuous hit is updated toward the final mode) Specific presentation executing means (for example, the part in which the presentation control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the notice presentation process and the big hit game process) capable of executing the first detection part. Means (for example, first push button in the second embodiment) and second detection means (for example, second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means; The specific effect executing means includes the first detection means and the second detection means after the operation is detected over a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period, When an operation is detected over a second period (for example, 0.05 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect is not executed even if the sum of the first period and the second period is equal to or greater than the predetermined period ( For example, if the player presses the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the sum of the first period and the second period is determined to be a long press. It may be configured such that the meter for continuous hitting is not updated by automatic hitting despite the interval being 0.2 seconds. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 1 to 10, the detecting means (for example, the first push button and the second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the player's action, and the detecting means Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 second which is the long press determination interval), the specific effect (for example, the display mode of the meter corresponding to the continuous hit is updated toward the final mode) Specific presentation executing means (for example, the part in which the presentation control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the notice presentation process and the big hit game process) capable of executing the first detection part. Means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and second detection means different from the first detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment) And the specific effect executing means, after the operation is detected over a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period in either one of the first detection means and the second detection means, On the other hand, when an operation is detected over a second period (eg, 0.05 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period, a specific effect can be executed when the sum of the first period and the second period is equal to or greater than the predetermined period. (For example, if the player presses the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the sum of the first period and the second period is It may be configured to update the meter corresponding to repeated hitting by automatic hitting based on the long press determination interval of 0.2 seconds). According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 1 to 11, the detection means (for example, the first push button and the second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the player's action, and the detection means Production execution means (for example, second embodiment) capable of executing at least a first production (for example, an image display of a push button) and a second production (for example, display of a message prompting an operation of a push button) The control CPU 101 for effect control includes a part for executing a notice effect process and a big hit game process, and the detection means includes a first detection means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and the first Second execution means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means, and the effect execution means relates to the first detection means. The first effect and the second effect can be executed as the effects (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 101 executes the image display of the first push button and the message prompting the operation of the first push button), and the second detection. The first effect and the second effect can be executed as effects related to the means (for example, the part for which the effect control CPU 101 executes the image display of the second push button and the message prompting the operation of the second push button). The first effect related to the first detecting means has a stronger effect intensity than the first effect related to the second detecting means (for example, a portion that displays the image of the first push button but does not display the image of the second push button). The second effect related to the first detection means has a stronger effect intensity than the second effect related to the second detection means (for example, the first push button is operated). The display of a message may be configured second portion not displayed message prompting operation of the push buttons) so while performing. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to the following (Means 13) to (Means 21). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in JP-A-2006-158842, in order to prompt a button operation, a promotion display for displaying a button image or the like is performed, and the button operation is performed according to the promotion display. There was one in which either production A (CHANCE) or production B (hot) was displayed. However, the conventional gaming machine described above does not suggest that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display. For this reason, interest was inadequate. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming effects.

(Means 13) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) and detecting means capable of detecting a player's action (For example, a push sensor 9035B, a controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and a promotion display execution means capable of executing a promotion display that prompts the player's action (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 or a controller image 90203, etc. ) And a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character role effect, etc.) based on the detection result of the detecting means, and the specific effect executing means Is a second specific effect (e.g., a first character effect operation effect, etc.) that is different from the first specific effect. For example, the second character combination action effect etc. can be executed, and the promotion display execution means is a first promotion display (for example, a diagram) that suggests that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display. 45 (C-2), a second promotion that suggests that the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905, and the second specific effect is executed. Display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47C-3, an effect such as a button image 90201 and a second character image 90212 displayed on the image display device 905) can be executed.

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 14) In the means 13, the specific effect executing means can execute and promote a third specific effect (for example, a third character actor action effect or the like) different from the first specific effect and the second specific effect. The display execution means includes a third accelerated display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4)) indicating that the third specific effect is executed, and the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are displayed on the image display device 905. It may be possible to execute such an effect that the third character image 90213 is displayed.

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 15) In the means 13 or 14, the specific effect executing means uses the first specific effect as a first effect mode (for example, the first character combination 9061 is the first character combination operation action first. A mode in which the character role moves from the first position P9011 to the first character role second position P9012, and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, the first character role 9061 is the first character). As the accessory rotation effect, it is possible to execute the rotation (autorotation) at the first character accessory second position P9012, and the promotion display executing means executes the first specific effect of the first effect aspect. The first promotion display can be performed when the first character image 9021 is displayed (for example, the first character image 90211 can be displayed when the first character actor action effect is performed). Etc.) may be.

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 16) In any one of the means 13 to the means 15, the detection means can detect an operation of a player's operation means (for example, a push button 9031B or a stick controller 9031A), and the first promotion The display and the second promotion display are displays that prompt the player to operate one operation means (for example, a button image for the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 48B-1). 90201 may be displayed, or a controller image 90203 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 48B-2).

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 17) In any one of the means 13 to 16, the promotion display executing means does not execute the second promotion display when the first specific effect is executed (for example, the first character combination) The image display device 905 may not display the second character image 90212 when the first character role effect in which the object 9061 operates is executed).

  According to the said structure, the fall of a production effect can be prevented.

(Means 18) In any one of the means 13 to the means 17, a period display (for example, an effective period bar or the like) for notifying an operation effective period (for example, a period during which the effect control board 9012 receives an operation of the push button 9031B). And a period display executing means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying the effective period bar 90202), and the display mode of the period display includes the first promotion display and the second promotion display. Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the effective period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 is green, and as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the second character image The validity period bar 90202 displayed together with 90212 may be red).

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 19) In any one of the means 13 to 18, the specific effect executing means includes the first specific effect related to the first character of the plurality of types of characters and the plurality of types of characters. The second specific effect related to the second character can be executed (for example, the first character accessory action effect and the second character accessory action effect can be executed), and the promotion display execution means includes the The first promotion display related to the first character and the second promotion display related to the second character can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45C-2), the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211. And the effect that the button image 90201 and the second character image 90212 are displayed can be executed as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3). It may be and so on).

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 20) In any one of the means 13 to 19, the promotion display executing means does not suggest that any one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is executed. Display (for example, an image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the image display device 905, and then the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed, etc.), and the specific effect is executed. The means can execute the first specific effect or the second specific effect after the normal promotion display is displayed (for example, an image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the image display device 905. As shown in FIG. 46 (D-2), the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed. 1 character combination product 9061 may be the equal) to perform the first character won game operation effect of moving the first character won game first position P9011 the first character won game second position P9012.

  According to the said structure, the interest improvement of game production can be aimed at.

(Means 21) Further, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) capable of performing a game, and a detecting means (for example, a push sensor 9035B, a controller sensor unit 9035A or the like) capable of detecting the player's operation. ) And specific display execution means (for example, an image display device 905) that performs specific display (for example, a button image 90201, a controller image 90203, etc.) corresponding to the detection means, and the specific display execution means As the specific display, it is possible to display a first specific display (for example, a button image 90201) and a second specific display (for example, a controller image 90203) having a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display. Ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, the operation of the push button 9031B is changed to the effect control board 9012) In a period before the receiving period), after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, the button image 90201 is changed to the controller image 90203). In the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, the period during which the operation of the push button 9031B is received by the effect control board 9012), the operation effect (for example, the controller image 90203 is displayed using the changed second specific display. Thereafter, the game machine may be characterized in that an effect or the like for notifying the jackpot result is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the production effect is improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of circuit configurations of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a cross key. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a brightness | luminance volume setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a brightness | luminance volume setting process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the specific example of brightness | luminance adjustment and volume adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the notification effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the notification effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the notification effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the difference of push button operation in a notice effect and alerting | reporting effect, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the long press performance of each push button. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notice effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is hit in the notice effect, and (C) is the notice It is explanatory drawing at the time of striking the 1st push button and the 2nd push button in production. (A) is explanatory drawing when only the 1st push button is long-pressed in the notice effect, and (B) is explanatory drawing when only the second push button is long-pressed in the notice effect. (A) is explanatory drawing at the time of long-pressing the 1st push button and the 2nd push button simultaneously in the notice effect, (B) is the second push after long-pressing the first push button in the notice effect. It is explanatory drawing at the time of long-pressing a button. (A) is an explanatory view when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notification effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is hit repeatedly in the notification effect, and (C) is the notification. It is explanatory drawing at the time of striking the 1st push button and the 2nd push button in production. (A) is explanatory drawing at the time of long press only of the 1st push button in information production, (B) is explanatory drawing at the time of long press only of the 2nd push button in information production. (A) is explanatory drawing at the time of long-pressing simultaneously the 1st push button and the 2nd push button in information production, (B) is the 2nd push after long-pressing the 1st push button in information production. It is explanatory drawing at the time of long-pressing a button. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a character accessory effect determination process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the character reach | attainment effect determination table at the time of super reach development, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the button image display determination table at the time of super reach development, (C), It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the image display determination table at the time of jackpot result alert | report. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character effect production at the time of super reach development. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character actor effect following FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the other example of the flow of the character role effect at the time of super reach development. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the character effect production at the time of big hit result alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing explaining the other example of FIG.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Therefore, it can be said that the reach effect is an effect suggesting that it is a big hit. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the outlier) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d is assimilated with the background image when the display is turned off. In order to prevent the image from becoming invisible, it is desirable that the display color be different from the background image (for example, black).

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 14 is such that the nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting prize opening 13 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting prize opening 13. This may be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first hold memory display unit 9a for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold memory display unit 9b for displaying the second hold memory number. ing. The first hold storage display unit 9a displays a first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. The second hold storage display unit 9b displays a second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold storage. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a 1st hold | maintenance memory and a 2nd hold | maintenance memory are displayed side by side in order of winning to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14, in the total holding storage display part, So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is higher (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of displaying a special symbol is higher than that in the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3, operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player are provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 may be configured not only to be provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player but also to be provided with a dial that can be rotated by the player. If comprised in that way, the player can perform predetermined | prescribed selection (for example, selection of production) by rotating the dial.

  Further, a cross key 130 is provided on the left side of the operation button 120 on the hit ball supply tray 3 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The cross key 130 is provided with push button switches that allow the player to perform pressing operations in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (ie, a special symbol). The display shifts to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 53 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 53 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the cross key 130 via the input port 107 in accordance with a pressing operation of the cross key 130 by the player in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the cross key 130. As shown in FIG. 4, the cross key 130 has an upward pressing operation unit 130a (a pressing operation unit on the back side as viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1), and a downward operation unit 130b. (The pressing operation portion on the near side as viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the left direction operation portion 130c (on the left side viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) A right operation unit 130d (a right operation unit viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1). The cross key 130 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the upward operation when the upward pressing operation unit 130a is pressed, and responds to the downward operation when the downward pressing operation unit 130b is pressed. When the left direction pressing operation unit 130c is pressed, a detection signal corresponding to the left direction operation is output, and when the right direction pressing operation unit 130d is pressed, the right direction operation is performed. The detected signal is output.

  In this embodiment, expressions such as an upward operation and a downward operation of the cross key 130 are used. Specifically, the expression is viewed from a player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. The upper pressing operation portion 130a provided on the back side is pressed, or the lower pressing operation portion 130a provided on the near side as viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pressed. Is to do.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 by operating the cross key 130. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the volume adjustment can be performed using the upward pressing operation portion 130a and the downward pressing operation portion 130b of the cross key 130, and the upward pressing operation portion 130a. The volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be increased by pressing the button, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be decreased by pressing the downward pressing operation unit 130b. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, it is possible to perform brightness adjustment using the left direction pressing operation unit 130 c and the right direction pressing operation unit 130 d of the cross key 130, and when the left direction pressing operation unit 130 c is pressed. When the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is increased and the right direction pressing operation unit 130d is pressed, the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 can be decreased.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 may also transmit the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not in a state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 53 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 53 to update the random R value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is made, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured so that all types of jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, it is not necessary to provide a jackpot. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you make a small hit, it will only shift to the probable change state (high probability state) and suddenly probable big hits without the short time state (high base state). Is preferably provided.

  FIGS. 7 and 8 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. If it is decided to make a big hit, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit type (for example, normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), and the decision result is stored in the big hit type buffer. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a variation pattern command (an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol displayed variably on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) according to the determined variation pattern is provided. The control is transmitted to, and a variable time timer for measuring the variable symbol time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command (whether to make a big hit, whether to make a big hit, and an effect control command indicating a big hit type) to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to send a specified command (production control command indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the 4th symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed), and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the big hit start designation command (normal big hit or the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit is designated) or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation to the microcomputer 100 for the production control Control is performed to transmit a command (an effect control command for designating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game based on sudden probability change big hit), and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example) Update to If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S308. Update to the corresponding value (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control processing is displayed as the special symbol display. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. A jackpot end designation command (ordination control command for designating the end of a big hit game based on a normal jackpot or a probable big hit) or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (a big hit game based on a sudden probable big hit or A control for transmitting an effect control command for designating the end of the small hit game is performed, and a control for causing the microcomputer 100 for the effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The effect control microcomputer 100 is controlled to transmit a small hit / suddenly probable big change end designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Control for. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received presentation control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the presentation control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). ).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) (step S627), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S629). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes a brightness volume setting process (step S800A) for setting the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27. In this embodiment, in the effect control process, the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) is executed before the processes in steps S800 to S807. Therefore, in addition to the effect display variation display, Even during the customer waiting demonstration display in which neither the fluctuation display nor the big hit game is performed, it is possible to adjust the brightness and volume.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the brightness | luminance volume setting process is performed within an effect control process process is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9, the luminance volume setting process may be executed before or after the effect control process.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  In step S8002, if the received display result designation command indicates “normal jackpot”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even symbols as the stop symbols. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same in odd symbols as the stop symbols. When the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of”, a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that is reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit is made, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the odd number symbols aligned, so that the odd number symbol is likely to become the probability variation big hit. Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the even symbols aligned, so it is recalled that the even symbols are not probable big hits (normally big hits). . Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a non-probable symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the notice effect (step S8003).

  In step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit, and if it is a big hit fluctuation, the big hit is used as a table for determining the presence and type of the notice effect. Select the notice effect determination table for Also, if the fluctuation is out of date, a notice effect determination table for loss is selected as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the notice effect. Whether or not the variable display to be started this time is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected notice effect determination table, and determines the presence and type of the notice effect.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the notice effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 15 (A) shows a specific example of the notice effect determination table for detachment that is selected in the case of detachment fluctuation. Further, FIG. 15B shows a specific example of the jackpot notice effect determination table selected when the jackpot variation. As shown in FIG. 15, in the notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, group notice effect, serif notice effect, and flash notice effect, respectively. . As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a determination value is assigned so that the proportion of execution of one of the notice effects is higher than in the case of a loss. Yes.

  Among the notice effects shown in FIG. 15, the “serif notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed in such a manner that the character is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the speech of the character's speech is output from the speaker 27. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the “serif notice effect” can be said to be a notice effect that is executed mainly by sound output from the speaker 27. In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, in addition to the sound output from the speaker 27, the character display of the character lines may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  The “flash notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed in a manner of performing flash display on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Therefore, in this embodiment, the “flash notice effect” can be said to be a notice effect that is executed mainly by the intensity of luminance on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, the notice effect that is executed during the change display of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. It may be configured to be executable.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the case where the presence / absence and type of the notice effect is determined according to whether or not the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the presence / absence and type of the notice effect may be determined in accordance with the variation pattern instead of whether or not it is a big hit or in addition to whether or not the big hit. In this case, for example, the presence / absence and type of the notice effect may be determined according to the presence / absence of normal reach, the presence / absence of super-reach, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the case where any one of the notice effects is configured to be executed during the change display of one effect symbol is shown. I can't. For example, it may be configured to be able to determine the execution of a plurality of notice effects at the same time, and to be able to execute a plurality of notice effects during a change display of one effect symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice pattern determined in the variation pattern and notice effect setting process (step S8003) (step S8004). Then, control goes to a step S8005.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8004 (step S8005).

  The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102).

  Next, when the process timer times out (step S8103), the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the execution of the speech advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect setting process (see step S8003), and it is the end timing of the speech advance notice effect (step S8106). ). It can be determined whether or not it is the end timing of the serif notice effect, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the end timing of the serif notice effect (Y in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 sets a serif notice execution flag indicating that the serif notice effect has been executed in the variation display of the effect symbol. (Step S8107). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

  If the execution of the serif notice effect is not determined or if the end timing of the serif notice effect is not reached (N in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 performs flash notice in the notice effect setting process (see step S8003). In the case where the execution of the effect is decided, it is confirmed whether it is the end timing of the flash notice effect (step S8108). Whether or not it is the end timing of the flash notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the change time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol change start process. If it is the end timing of the flash notice effect (Y in step S8108), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flash notice executed flag indicating that the flash notice effect has been executed in the change display of the effect symbol. (Step S8109). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8111).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first resets the speech advance notice execution flag or the flash advance notice execution flag if set (step S8300).

  In this embodiment, when a speech advance notice effect or a flash advance notice effect is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the speech advance notice executed flag or the flash advance notice executed flag is reset at the end of the effect symbol change. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to reset the speech advance notice execution flag or the flash advance notice execution flag based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the end of the speech advance notice effect or the flash advance notice effect. .

  Also, for example, in the case where a plurality of notice effects can be executed during the change display of one effect symbol, after the line notice effect is ended and the line notice executed flag is set, the flash notice effect is set. Based on the fact that the flash notice execution flag has been switched from the flash advance notice execution flag to the flash advance notice execution flag (sets the advance notice execution flag and resets the advance notice execution flag) After setting the flash advance notice execution flag, the flash advance notice execution flag is switched from the flash advance notice execution flag to the set based on the end of the advance notice effect. May be set).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to confirm and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-order symbol or jackpot symbol) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big win nor small win is made (N in Step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag in accordance with the variation pattern command reception waiting process (Step S800). The value is updated (step S8311).

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) in the effect control process. In the luminance volume setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a luminance adjustment operation using the cross key 130 has been detected (step S4000). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the left direction pressing operation unit 130c or the right direction pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. If no brightness adjustment operation is detected (N in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4001). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. If the volume adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4001), that is, if only the volume adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the volume setting in accordance with the volume adjustment operation ( Step S4002). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is increased by one level, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

  If the brightness adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4003). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. If the volume adjustment operation is not detected (N in step S4003), that is, if only the brightness adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the setting of the brightness in accordance with the brightness adjustment operation ( Step S4004). Specifically, the luminance setting is increased by one step when a detection signal is input from the left direction pressing operation unit 130c, and the luminance setting is 1 when a detection signal is input from the right direction pressing operation unit 130d. Step down.

  If the volume adjustment operation is detected in step S4003 (Y in step S4003), both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the speech advance notice completion flag is set (step S4005). If the speech advance notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control gives priority to the volume adjustment operation, and changes the volume setting according to the volume adjustment operation (step S4006). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is increased by one level, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

  The fact that the speech advance notice completion flag is set means that the state immediately after the execution of the speech advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbol is executed. In this embodiment, as already described, since the speech advance notice effect is a notice effect executed mainly by sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment operation is the intention of the player's correct operation. Can be estimated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processing of steps S4005 and S4006, and immediately after the execution of the speech warning effect, It is configured to prioritize the volume setting.

  If the speech advance notice execution flag is not set (N in step S4005), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the flash advance notice execution flag is set (step S4007). If the flash advance notice completion flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control gives priority to the brightness adjustment operation and changes the brightness setting according to the brightness adjustment operation (step S4008). Specifically, the luminance setting is increased by one step when a detection signal is input from the left direction pressing operation unit 130c, and the luminance setting is 1 when a detection signal is input from the right direction pressing operation unit 130d. Step down.

  The fact that the flash advance notice execution flag is set means that the state immediately after executing the flash advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, as already described, since the flash notice effect is a notice effect that is executed mainly by the intensity of the luminance on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the brightness adjustment operation is performed by the player. It can be assumed that the intention is correct operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processes of steps S4007 and S4008, and immediately after the execution of the flash notice effect, It is configured to prioritize the luminance setting.

  If the flash advance notice completion flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control detects that the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation are a brightness increase operation (operation to increase the brightness setting) and a volume decrease operation (volume setting). (Operation for lowering) is confirmed (step S4009). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation is a combination of a detection signal from the left direction pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and a detection signal from the down direction pressing operation unit 130b. Can be determined by confirming whether or not this is the case. If it is a combination of a brightness-up operation and a volume-down operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume-down operation and lowers the volume setting by one level (step S4010).

  If it is not a combination of a brightness up operation and a volume down operation, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation are a brightness down operation (operation for lowering the brightness setting) and a volume up operation (volume). (Operation for increasing the setting) is confirmed (step S4011). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation is a combination of a detection signal from the right direction pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 and a detection signal from the up direction pressing operation unit 130a. Can be determined by confirming whether or not this is the case. If it is a combination of a brightness down operation and a volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the brightness down operation and lowers the brightness setting by one level (step S4012).

  If it is not a combination of a brightness down operation and a volume up operation, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation are a combination of a brightness up operation and a volume up operation ( Step S4013). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness-up operation and the volume-up operation is a combination of a detection signal from the left direction pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and a detection signal from the up direction pressing operation unit 130a. Can be determined by confirming whether or not this is the case. If it is a combination of a brightness-up operation and a volume-up operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current brightness setting level is higher than the current volume setting level (step S4014). If the current luminance setting level is higher than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 prioritizes the volume increase operation and raises the volume setting by one level (step S4015). On the other hand, if the current brightness setting level is not higher than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current brightness setting level is equal to or lower than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 increases the brightness. The operation is prioritized and the brightness setting is increased by one level (step S4016).

  Note that the current luminance setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current luminance setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not higher than the current sound volume setting level, it is determined as N in step S4014, the process proceeds to step S4016, and the brightness setting is increased by one step in priority to the brightness increase operation. It is configured as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting operation may be prioritized to increase the volume setting by one level. Good.

  If it is not a combination of a brightness up operation and a volume up operation, it is a combination of a brightness down operation and a volume down operation. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current luminance setting level is lower than the current volume setting level (step S4017). If the current brightness setting level is lower than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 prioritizes the volume reduction operation and lowers the volume setting by one level (step S4018). On the other hand, if the current luminance setting level is not smaller than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current luminance setting level is equal to or higher than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 reduces the luminance. The operation is prioritized and the brightness setting is lowered by one level (step S4019).

  Note that the current luminance setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current luminance setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not smaller than the current sound volume setting level, it is determined as N in step S4017, and the process proceeds to step S4019, where the brightness setting operation is prioritized and the brightness setting is lowered by one level. It is configured as follows. Not only in such a state, but also if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting may be reduced by one step with priority given to the volume down operation. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the input itself of both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation is accepted, and then in the luminance volume setting process. Although it has been shown that the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are prioritized and the luminance adjustment and the volume adjustment processing are performed, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 itself may be configured to output only the detection signal for one of the operations. In this case, for example, even when the brightness down operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 may be configured to output only a detection signal for the brightness down operation.

  Also, for example, when both the detection signal for the brightness adjustment operation and the detection signal for the volume adjustment operation are input at the same time, only one of the detection signals is input and the other detection signal is discarded. An input circuit or the like on the computer 100 side may be configured. In this case, for example, even when the detection signal for the luminance down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation are input at the same time, the input circuit or the like inputs only the detection signal for the luminance down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation. May be configured to be discarded.

  Next, specific examples of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment will be described. FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining a specific example of luminance adjustment and volume adjustment. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, the luminance setting level can be set in five levels from level 1 to level 5, and the volume setting level can be set in five levels from level 1 to level 5. Suppose that In the example shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the luminance setting level is set to level 4 and the volume setting level is set to level 3 as an initial state. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20, the following description will be given on the assumption that it is not immediately after the dialogue notice effect or the flash notice effect is executed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the brightness setting level can be adjusted to level 0, the display screen of the effect display device 9 can be completely darkened, and the volume setting level can be adjusted to level 0. You may comprise so that it can completely mute as possible.

  In the above state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T1, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. Assume that the operation was an up operation and a volume down operation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, priority is given to the sound volume down operation, the sound volume setting level is changed to a level one step down from level 3 to level 2, and the brightness setting level remains at level 4 (step S4009). , S4010).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T2, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and a combination of the detected operations is a brightness down operation. It is assumed that the operation is a volume up operation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, the luminance down operation is prioritized, the luminance setting level is changed to a level one step down from level 4 to level 3, and the volume setting level remains at level 2 (step S4011). , S4012).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at timing T3, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and a combination of detected operations is a brightness increase operation. It is assumed that the operation is a volume up operation. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current volume setting level is 2 at timing T3, the current luminance setting level is higher than the current volume setting level (step S4014). As shown in FIG. 20, the sound volume up operation is prioritized, the sound volume setting level is changed to a level that increases by one level from level 2 to level 3, and the brightness setting level remains at level 3 (step S4015). reference).

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the luminance setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T4, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. It is assumed that the operation was a volume up operation. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current volume setting level is 3 at timing T4, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level (step S4014). As shown in FIG. 20, priority is given to the luminance increase operation, the luminance setting level is changed to a level that is increased by one level from level 2 to level 3, and the volume setting level remains at level 3 (step S4016). reference).

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the luminance setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at timing T5, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. It is assumed that the operation was a volume down operation. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current volume setting level is 3 at timing T5, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level (step S4017). As shown in FIG. 20, priority is given to the sound volume down operation, the sound volume setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level remains at level 2 (step S4018). reference).

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the luminance setting level is changed to level 3 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that an operation using the cross key 130 is performed at timing T6, and a brightness adjustment operation and a volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. It is assumed that the operation was a volume down operation. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current volume setting level is 2 at timing T6, the current luminance setting level is greater than the current volume setting level (step S4017). As shown in FIG. 20, the luminance down operation is prioritized, and the luminance setting level is changed from the level 3 to the level 2 by one step, and the luminance setting level remains at the level 2 (step S4019). reference).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the range of the luminance setting level and the volume setting level is the same in five levels of level 1 to level 5. However, the setting stage may be different between the luminance setting level and the volume setting level. For example, the luminance setting level can be adjusted in three steps from level 1 to level 3, while the volume setting level can be adjusted in ten steps from level 1 to level 10. In this case, for example, when the luminance setting level is level 3 and the volume setting level is level 7, the apparent numerical level is higher at the level 7 but the luminance setting level is higher. Is the maximum value of level 3. Therefore, it is determined that the luminance stage is higher (the luminance is the current setting level is higher), and either luminance or volume is given priority. May be adjusted.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume (in this example, the upward pressing operation portion 130a and the downward operation portion 130b of the cross key 130), the luminance Processing for adjusting the volume based on an operation on the volume adjustment operation means, which includes a luminance adjustment operation means (in this example, a left direction pressing operation portion 130c and a right direction operation portion 130d of the cross key 130) for performing the adjustment. In addition, it is possible to execute a process for performing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. Further, when an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjustment operation unit and an operation of increasing the luminance by the luminance adjustment operation unit are performed, the process of lowering the volume is preferentially executed (see the process at timing T1 shown in FIG. 20). . Therefore, it can prevent that a production effect falls. That is, when both the operation for decreasing the volume and the operation for increasing the brightness are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is too loud. Since it is considered high, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being lowered by giving priority to the process of lowering the volume.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when an operation of lowering the luminance by the luminance adjustment operation unit and an operation of raising the volume by the volume adjustment operation unit are performed, the process of lowering the luminance is performed with priority (FIG. 20). (See processing at timing T2 shown in FIG. 4). Therefore, it can prevent that a production effect falls. That is, when both the operation of decreasing the brightness and the operation of increasing the volume are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is too high. Since it is considered to be high, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from decreasing by preferentially executing the process of reducing the luminance.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when an operation for increasing the volume by the volume adjustment operation unit and an operation for increasing the luminance by the luminance adjustment operation unit are performed, the lower one of the volume and the luminance stage is increased. The processing is executed with priority (see processing at timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it can prevent that a production effect falls. That is, when both the operation for raising the volume and the operation for raising the brightness are performed, it is considered that the lower the current stage of production (setting level) has more room for raising the stage of production and the higher priority is given. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of raising the lower one of the production stages of brightness and brightness.

  In this embodiment, when both an operation for increasing the volume and an operation for increasing the brightness are performed, a case where priority is given to the process of increasing the lower one of the sound volume and the luminance stage is performed. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when both an operation for increasing the volume and an operation for increasing the brightness are performed, the processing for increasing the higher one of the volume and the brightness in the production stage may be preferentially executed. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a brightness increase operation and a volume increase operation are performed at the same time, a process of increasing the setting level by giving priority to the lower of the current setting level of the volume and luminance is performed. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a brightness increase operation and a volume increase operation are performed at the same time, it may be configured to increase the setting level with priority given to either one of the volume and the brightness in advance (modified example) A). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the volume and brightness.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjustment operation unit and an operation of lowering the luminance by the luminance adjustment operation unit are performed, the higher one of the production stage of the volume and the luminance is lowered. The processing is executed with priority (see processing at timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it can prevent that a production effect falls. In other words, when both the operation for decreasing the volume and the operation for decreasing the brightness are performed, it is considered that the higher the current stage of production (setting level) has more room for lowering the stage of production and the priority is higher. By preferentially executing the process of lowering the higher one of the production stages of brightness and luminance, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, when both an operation for lowering the volume and an operation for lowering the brightness are performed, a case where priority is given to the process of increasing the higher production stage of the volume and the brightness is shown. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when both an operation for lowering the volume and an operation for lowering the brightness are performed, it may be configured to preferentially execute the process of lowering the lower production stage of the volume and the brightness. Good.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a brightness down operation and a volume down operation are performed at the same time, a process of lowering the set level by giving priority to the higher set level of the volume and brightness is performed. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, the setting level may be lowered by giving priority to either one of the volume and the brightness in advance (modified example) B). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the volume and brightness.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation by the volume adjustment operation unit and the operation by the brightness adjustment operation unit are performed, the volume and the luminance are set based on the effect performed before the operation is performed. Priority is given to the process of adjusting one of them (in this example, if the speech warning effect is executed immediately before, the volume adjustment is given priority and the flash warning effect is executed immediately before. The brightness adjustment is prioritized). Therefore, it can prevent that a production effect falls. In other words, immediately after the speech announcement effect that is executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment is preferentially executed, and the flash notification that is executed mainly by the intensity of luminance on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Immediately after the performance, the brightness adjustment is performed with priority, so that the player's intention can be taken in and the volume or brightness can be adjusted, so that the effect of the performance can be prevented from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, the volume adjustment is preferentially executed if the line preview effect is executed immediately before, and the luminance adjustment is preferentially executed if the flash notice effect is executed immediately before. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when various notice effects other than the serif notice effect and the flash notice effect are configured to be executable, the sound volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment should be prioritized and executed for all the notice effects. You may comprise.

  In addition, for example, when it is configured to associate the volume adjustment with priority or the brightness adjustment with respect to a plurality of notice effects as described above, the notice effect having a stronger effect intensity (for example, It is also possible to configure such that the period in which priority execution of volume adjustment or luminance adjustment is reflected becomes longer as the announcement effect executed at a higher volume and the announcement effect executed at a higher luminance. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol variation processing or the effect symbol variation stop process, the length of the period until the dialogue advance notice execution flag or the flash advance notice execution flag is reset is made different according to the effect intensity. That's fine.

  In this embodiment, as the volume adjustment operation means and the brightness adjustment operation means, the upward pressing operation portion 130a and the downward pressing operation portion 130b of the cross key 130, the leftward pressing operation portion 130c and the rightward pressing operation, respectively. Although the case where it implement | achieves by the operation part 130d was shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, an operation button dedicated to volume adjustment and an operation button dedicated to brightness adjustment may be provided, and various modes of operation means are conceivable.

  Moreover, although this embodiment shows the case where the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 are adjusted, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that the brightness and light quantity of LEDs and lamps provided in the gaming machine such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28 can be adjusted, and the processing shown in this embodiment may be applied.

  In addition to brightness adjustment and volume adjustment, for example, when the frequency of execution of a predetermined notice effect can be adjusted in a plurality of steps (for example, from 1 step to 5 steps) or an operation button having a vibration function is provided, the vibration operation May be adjustable in a plurality of levels (for example, 1 to 5 levels), and may be configured to apply the configuration described in this embodiment to various adjustment targets. .

  In this embodiment, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed simultaneously, only one of the operations is prioritized by disabling the other operation. Although shown, the method of giving priority to one operation is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the adjustment process based on the priority operation is executed first, and then the adjustment process based on the other operation is executed. May be.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a so-called automatic continuous hitting function for detecting that a continuous hitting operation is being performed based on the long press operation being continued may be provided. Hereinafter, a second embodiment configured to have an automatic continuous hitting function will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, instead of the operation button 120 shown in the first embodiment, a stick controller that can be held and tilted by the player near the center of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. (Not shown) and a first push button (not shown) that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like are provided, and the player can operate by a pressing operation or the like in the vicinity of the hitting operation handle 5. It is assumed that a second push button (not shown) is provided.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are “probability variation A” and “non-probability variation”, which are 16 round big hits, and “probability variation B”, which is a big hit for 5 rounds.

  In this embodiment, in the effect symbol changing process (step S802), the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect process for executing the notice effect.

  21 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the notice effect processing in the second embodiment. In the notice effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the notice effect executing flag is set, that is, whether or not the notice effect is started (S331).

  When the notice effect executing flag is not set (S331; N), in S332, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the notice effect start wait timer by -1. The notice effect start waiting timer is set in the selection of the process table when it is decided to perform the notice effect in the effect symbol variation start process. If the notice effect start waiting timer has not timed out (S333; N), the process is terminated. If the notice production start wait timer has timed out, that is, if it is the start timing of the notice production (S333; Y), the flow proceeds to S334.

  In S334, the effect control CPU 101 sets a notice effect executing flag indicating that the notice effect is being executed. Further, a value corresponding to the notice effect period corresponding to the notice effect is set in the notice effect period timer (S335).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads and sets the notice effect process table corresponding to the notice effect to be executed (the notice effect A and the notice effect B) (S336), and then the notice effect in the process data 1 of the selected process table. The process timer is started (S337). In this embodiment, the notice effect process table corresponding to all combinations of the notice effects (notice effect A and notice effect B) is stored in the ROM in advance.

  The production control CPU 101 produces the production according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.) of the set notice production process table. Control of the devices (the effect display device 9 as an effect part, the decoration LED 25 as the effect part, the frame LED 28, the speaker 27 as the effect part, the stick controller, the first push button, the second push button) is started. (S338).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of times the first push button or the second push button has been operated (number of consecutive hits) during the operation reception period of the first push button or the second push button while the notice effect is being executed. And the long push operation of the first push button and the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button during execution of the notice effect. 2 The value of the automatic repeated hit counter for counting the number of push button operations (number of automatic repeated hits) and the long push operation of the first push button or the second push button are the first push button or the second push. Set the value of the long press determination timer to "0" to measure the period considered as button operation. To end the advance notification effect processing (S339, S340, S341).

  In the present embodiment, a continuous hit counter for counting the number of times the first push button or the second push button has been operated (number of consecutive hits) and a long press operation of the first push button or the second push button are performed. Although an example has been illustrated in which an automatic repeated hit counter for counting the number of times (automatic repeated hits) regarded as the operation of the first push button or the second push button is individually provided, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of this, the automatic repeated hit count may be added to the repeated hit count counter, and the automatic repeated hit counter may not be provided.

  In S331, if the flag for executing the notice effect is set, the process proceeds to S342 and the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the notice effect process timer for changing the process of the notice effect. Then, the value of the notice effect period timer for timing the end of the notice effect period is decremented by 1 (S343). When the notice effect period timer has timed out (value becomes 0) (S344; Y), the notice effect executing flag is cleared and the notice effect process ends (S356).

  If the notice effect period timer has not timed out (S344; N), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the notice effect process timer has expired (S345). If the notice effect process timer has timed out, the notice effect process data of the notice effect is switched (S346). That is, the process timer is started anew by setting the next setting of the notice effect process timer set value in the notice effect process table in the process timer (S347). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) based on display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data, etc. included in the next notice effect process data set thereafter Is changed (S348a), and the process proceeds to S349.

  When the notice effect process timer has not timed out (S345; N), display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound control execution included in the notice effect process data corresponding to the notice effect process timer being executed. Based on the data, operation unit control execution data, and the like, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed (S348b), and the process proceeds to S349.

  In S349, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the operation promotion image display start timing. When it is the promotion image display timing (S349; Y), the display of the first push button image as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 is started, and the display of the continuous hitting meter on the effect display device 9 is started. , The process proceeds to S352. If it is not the operation promotion image display start timing (S349; N), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S352 without going through S350 and S351.

  In S352, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is during the push button operation acceptance period based on the content of the notice effect process data being executed. If it is during the push button operation acceptance period (S352; Y), the process proceeds to S361. If it is not during the push button operation acceptance period (S352; N), it is further based on the content of the notice effect process data being executed. Then, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the image display effect (S353). When it is the start timing of the image display effect (S353; Y), it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the repeated hit counter and the value of the automatic repeated hit counter reaches the number of executions of the image display effect (the meter corresponding to the repeated hit is the final mode) It is determined whether or not it has been updated to (full tank) (S354).

  When the sum of the value of the repeated strike counter and the value of the automatic repeated strike counter reaches the number of executions of the image display effect (S354; Y), the display of the image according to the effect type is started on the effect display device 9. The notice effect processing is terminated (S355).

  If it is not the timing for starting the image display effect (S353; N), or if the sum of the value of the counter for the number of repeated hits and the value of the automatic repeat count counter has not reached the number of executions of the image display effect (S354; N), execute S355. The notice effect processing is finished without. In addition, in this Embodiment, when the operation reception period of a push button is complete | finished, if the meter corresponding to continuous hitting is the last aspect, the form which displays the image according to the effect type on the effect display device 9 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the operation accepting period of the push button is in the final mode, if the meter corresponding to continuous hitting is in the final form, the effect display device 9 is not waited for the end of the accepting period of the push button operation. An image corresponding to the effect type may be displayed.

  In S361, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the first push button. When there is an operation of the first push button (S361; Y), a button LED emission process (S362) for causing the first push button to emit light, and a vibration motor (not shown) for causing the first push button to vibrate. A vibration motor drive process (S363) for driving (vibrating) is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated during the push button operation reception period regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period The light emission mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether the first push button is operated.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a first push button long press determination flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long pressed is set (S364). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S364; Y), the process proceeds to S368, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S364; N), the number of repeated hits The counter value is incremented by 1 (S365), the first push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S368 (S366).

  If it is determined in S361 that the first push button is not operated (S361; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S368 (S367).

  In S368, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. If there is an operation on the second push button (S368; Y), it is determined whether or not a second push button long press determining flag for determining whether or not the second push button is long pressed is set. Determination is made (S369). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S369; Y), the process proceeds to S373. If the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S369; N), the number of repeated hits The counter value is incremented by 1 (S370), the second push button long-pressing determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S373 (S371).

  If it is determined in S368 that the second push button is not operated (S368; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and advance to S373 (S372).

  In S373, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. If both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y), the process proceeds to S391, where the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long determination flag When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S373; N) ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374).

  If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y), the process proceeds to S376, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S374; N), further It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determining flag is set (S375). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y), the process proceeds to S382, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S375; N), the notice effect The process ends.

  In S376, the effect control CPU 101 increments the long press determination timer by 1 based on the fact that the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y) (S376), and the value of the long press determination timer It is determined whether or not an automatic continuous hitting judgment value that regards the long push operation of the first push button as an operation of the first push button has been reached (S377). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S377; Y), a first push button automatic continuous hitting flag indicating that the first push button is being automatically pressed is set (S378). Then, it is determined whether or not a second push button automatic continuous hitting flag indicating that the second push button is being automatically pressed is set (S379).

  When the second push button automatic continuous hitting flag is set (S379; Y), that is, when the second push button is already in the automatic multi-stroke and the automatic push of the first push button is further started. Then, the second push button automatic continuous hitting flag is cleared (S380), the value of the automatic continuous hit count counter is set to “0”, and the process proceeds to S393 (S381). If the second push button automatic continuous hitting flag is not set (S379; N), the process proceeds to S393 without going through S380 and S381.

  In S382, the effect control CPU 101 increments the long press determination timer by 1 based on the fact that the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y) (S382), and the long press determination timer. It is determined whether or not the value is an automatic continuous hit determination value in which a long press operation of the second push button is regarded as an operation of the second push button (S383). Note that the long press determination timer that increments by 1 in S382 (the long press determination timer for determining the long press of the second push button) is the long press determination timer that increments by 1 in S376 (to determine the long press of the first push button). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination timer for determining long press of the first push button and the long press of the second push button are not limited to this. A long press determination timer different from the long press determination timer may be used.

  When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S383; Y), a second push button automatic continuous hitting flag indicating that the second push button is being automatically pressed is set (S384). Then, it is determined whether or not a first push button automatic continuous hitting flag indicating that the first push button is being automatically pressed is set (S385).

  When the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button is already in automatic continuous hitting, and the second push button has been automatically repeated. Then, the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), the value of the automatic continuous hit count counter is set to “0”, and the process proceeds to S393 (S387). If the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387.

  In S377 and S383, when the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value, the notice effect process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long push of the first push button and the long push of the second push button are determined using the long press determination timer, and the automatic continuous strike is established using the long press determination timer. Although a mode in which the determination of automatic continuous hitting is performed using the long press determination timer even after the determination is made is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long push of the first push button or the second push button Different timers may be used for the timer for determining the long press of the timer and the timer for determining the automatic continuous hit after determining the establishment of the automatic continuous hit based on the long press.

  In S391, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the long push determination timer is set based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y). Whether the value of the long press determination timer is an automatic repeated hit determination value that considers the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. It is determined whether or not (S392). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; Y), after executing one of S381 and S387, the value of the long press determination timer is set to “0” (S393), The value of the automatic repeated hit counter is incremented by 1 (S394), and the process proceeds to S395. When the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic repeated hit determination value (S392; N), the process proceeds to S395 without passing through S393 and S394.

  When the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button is already in automatic continuous hitting, and the second push button has been automatically repeated. Then, the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), the value of the automatic continuous hit count counter is set to “0”, and the process proceeds to S393 (S387). If the first push button automatic continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387. Then, in S395, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits in accordance with the sum of the repeated hit count counter and the automatic repeated hit count counter, and ends the notice effect processing.

  That is, in the notice effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic push of the first push button is started in a state where the value of the automatic continuous strike counter is added based on the automatic push of the second push button, The value of the automatic repeated hit counter added based on the automatic push of the two push buttons becomes invalid, and the value of the automatic repeated hit counter is added again based on the automatic repeated hit of the first push button.

  In addition, when the automatic push of the second push button is started in a state where the value of the automatic continuous strike counter is added based on the automatic push of the first push button, the automatic push of the first push button is started. The value of the added automatic repeated hit counter becomes invalid, and the value of the automatic repeated hit counter is added again based on the automatic repeated hit of the second push button.

  Further, when the first push button and the second push button are simultaneously pressed for a long time, the value of the automatic repeated hit counter is not different from the case where one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed for a long time. Addition is performed. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (both strikes) both the first push button and the second push button, both the first push button and the second push button are repeatedly operated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit counter is added.

  That is, in the notice effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are simultaneously pressed and held, one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed and pressed If the meter for continuous hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes both the first push button and the second push button (repeatedly), the player presses the first push button and the second push button. The repetitive hitting meter is updated faster than the case where one operation with the two push buttons is repeatedly executed (sequential hitting). In the case where the player repeatedly executes the operations of both the first push button and the second push button, the speed at which the player repeatedly strikes the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit. Depending on. When the operations of the first push button and the second push button are repeatedly executed (struck repeatedly) and the operations of the first push button and the second push button are detected during the same interruption. The operation of the first push button and the second push button may be determined as the push button is operated once or the push button is not operated.

  FIGS. 24 to 26 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the big hit game processing in the second embodiment. Note that the big hit game processing corresponds to, for example, the in-round processing (step S805) and the post-round processing (step S806) described in the first embodiment. In the big hit game processing, the production control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a special command opening flag receiving command reception flag indicating that a special command after opening the special winning opening has been received is set (S411). If the designated command reception flag is set after the big winning opening is opened (S411; Y), whether or not the finished round is the final round, that is, the jackpot type of the jackpot game is “probability change A” or “non- If it is “probable change”, it is determined whether or not the designated command after the big winning opening is a command indicating the 16th round. If the big hit type of the big winning game is “probable change B”, the big winning opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the subsequent designation command is a command indicating the fifth round (S433).

  If the finished round is the final round (S433; Y), the designated command reception flag is cleared after opening the big prize opening (S434), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process. To finish the big hit game processing. If the finished round is not the final round (S433; N), the big hit game processing is terminated without going through S434 and S435.

  Also, if the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is not set in S411 (S411; N), the designation command receiving flag during opening of the big prize opening indicating that the designation command during opening of the big prize opening has been received is set. It is determined whether or not it is performed (S412). If the special winning opening open designated command reception flag is not set (S412; N), the process proceeds to S422, and if the special winning opening open designated command reception flag is set (S412; Y), the notification effect. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (S413). In the present embodiment, the execution round of the notification effect is the sixth round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the round for executing the notification effect is any round of 1 to 16 rounds. It may be determined by lottery for each big hit game.

  When it is not the execution round of the notification effect (S413; N), the round effect process table corresponding to the round is set (S414), and the round exercise process timer is started to end the big hit game process (S415). . If it is the execution round of the notification effect (S413; Y), it is determined whether or not the execution of the probability change notification effect is determined (S416).

  If there is a decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; Y), that is, if the jackpot big hit type is “probability change A”, the process table for probability change notification effect is set as a round effect and the process proceeds to S419 ( S417). Further, when there is no decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; N), that is, when the jackpot big hit type is “non-probability change”, a process table for non-probability change notification effect as a round effect is set. The process proceeds to S419 (S418).

  In S419, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the repeated hit counter, the value of the automatic repeated hit counter, and the value of the long press determination timer to “0”, respectively, and ends the big hit game processing (S419, S420, S421).

  In S422, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the round effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the special winning opening open designation command reception flag is not set (S412; N). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the round production process timer has expired (S423). If the round effect process timer has timed out (S423; Y), the process data for round effect is switched (S424). That is, by setting the process timer setting value set next in the round effect process table in the round effect process timer, the round effect process timer is started again (S425). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, and the like set next (S426a). On the other hand, when the round production process timer has not timed out (S423; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the round production process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation) The production device (production component) is controlled according to the section control data (S426b).

  After the execution of S426a or S426b, the effect control CPU 101 and the message that prompts the player to operate the first push button multiple times (sequential hits) (for example, “sequential hit!”). It is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image including (S427). When it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; Y), the first push button image and a message prompting the player to operate the first push button multiple times (sequential hits) (for example, “sequential hit” Display of the operation promoting image including “!” And the like, and display of the meter corresponding to repeated hitting are started in the effect display device 9, and the process proceeds to S430 (S428, S429). If it is not the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; N), the process proceeds to S430 without executing S428 and S429.

  In S430, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of the push buttons (the first push button and the second push button) is being accepted. If it is not during the push button operation acceptance period (S430; N), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431). When it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431; Y), display of an image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the effect type of the image display effect is started on the effect display device 9 and the big hit game is being played The process ends (S432), and when it is not the start timing of the image display effect (S431; N), the big hit game effect is ended without going through S432.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which an image corresponding to the effect type is displayed on the effect display device 9 when the push button operation acceptance period ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, even if it is during the push button operation acceptance period, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits is in the final mode, the image corresponding to the effect type is displayed on the effect display device 9 without waiting for the end of the push button operation acceptance period. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the first push button or the second push button is accepted in the sixth round during the big hit game, and an image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the production type is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reception of the operation of the first push button and the second push button and the display of the image according to the production type are respectively You may run in different rounds.

  If the push button operation acceptance period is in S430 (S430; Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the first push button (S441). When there is an operation of the first push button (S441; Y), a button LED light emission process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light, and a vibration motor is driven (vibration) to vibrate the first push button. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be performed is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated during the push button operation reception period regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period The light emission mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether the first push button is operated.

  And it is determined whether the 1st push button long press determination flag for determining whether the 1st push button is long pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448. If the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits The counter value is incremented by 1 (S445), and the first push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

  In S <b> 448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), a button LED emission process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light, and a vibration motor is driven (vibration) to vibrate the first push button. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be performed is executed. And it is determined whether the 1st push button long press determination flag for determining whether the 1st push button is long pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448. If the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits The counter value is incremented by 1 (S445), and the first push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

  If it is determined in S441 that the first push button is not operated (S441; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and advance to S448 (S447).

  In S <b> 448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), it is determined whether or not a second push button long press determining flag for determining whether or not the second push button is pressed is set. Determination is made (S449). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S449; Y), the process proceeds to S453, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S449; N), the number of repeated hits The counter value is incremented by 1 (S450), the second push button long-pressing determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S453 (S451).

  If it is determined in S448 that the second push button is not operated (S448; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and advance to S453 (S452).

  In S453, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. If both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y), the process proceeds to S461, and the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long determination flag When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S453; N) ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454).

  If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S454; N), further It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determining flag is set (S455). When the second push button long press determination flag is set (S455; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and when the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S455; N), the big hit game The medium production process ends.

  In S456, the CPU 101 for effect control has the first push button long press determination flag set (S454; Y) or the second push button long press determination flag has been set (S455; Y). Based on the above, the long press determination timer is incremented by 1 (S456), and it is determined whether or not the value of the long press determination timer has become the automatic continuous hit determination value (S457). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S457; Y), the process proceeds to S463. When the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic repeated hit determination value (S457; N), the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  In S461, the effect control CPU 101 sets the long push determination timer based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y). Whether the value of the long press determination timer is an automatic repeated hit determination value that considers the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. It is determined whether or not (S462). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value in S457 or S462 (S462 or S457; Y), the value of the long press determination timer is set to “0” (S463), and the automatic repeated hit count counter Is incremented by 1 (S464), and the process proceeds to S465. If the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value in S462 (S392; N), the process proceeds to S465 without passing through S463 and S464. Note that the long press determination timer that increments by 1 in S461 (the long press determination timer for determining that both the first push button and the second push button are long depressed) is the long press determination timer that increments by 1 in S456 ( The same timer as the long press determination timer for determining the long press of only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first push button A long press determination timer for determining that both of the first push button and the second push button are long pressed, and a long press determination timer for determining a long press of only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32 May be different long press determination timers.

  Then, in S465, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hitting according to the sum of the repeated hit count counter and the automatic repeated hit count counter, and ends the notice effect processing.

  That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic push of the first push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic continuous strike counter is added based on the automatic push of the second push button, The value of the automatic repeated hit counter added based on the automatic push of the two push buttons is taken over by the automatic push of the first push button.

  In addition, when the automatic push of the second push button is started in a state where the value of the automatic continuous strike counter is added based on the automatic push of the first push button, the automatic push of the first push button is started. The value of the counter for the number of times of automatic repeated hits added is taken over by the automatic repeated hit of the second push button.

  Further, when the first push button and the second push button are simultaneously pressed for a long time, the value of the automatic repeated hit counter is not different from the case where one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed for a long time. Addition is performed. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (both strikes) both the first push button and the second push button, both the first push button and the second push button are repeatedly operated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit counter is added.

  That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are simultaneously pressed for a long time, one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed for a long time; If the meter for continuous hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes both the first push button and the second push button (repeatedly), the player presses the first push button and the second push button. The repetitive hitting meter is updated faster than the case where one operation with the two push buttons is repeatedly executed (sequential hitting). When the player repeatedly executes the operations of both the first push button and the second push button, it depends on the speed at which the player repeatedly strikes the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit. Different.

  As described above, in the notice effect and the notice effect in the present embodiment, the player pushes as shown in FIGS. 28 (A), 28 (B), 31 (A), and 31 (B). When only one of the first push button and the second push button is repeatedly hit during the button operation reception period, the display of the repeated hit meter is updated every time the first push button or the second push button is operated, Finally, the meter for continuous hits is full (final mode). In addition, as shown in FIG. 27A, FIG. 28C, and FIG. 31C, when the player strikes both the first push button and the second push button continuously during the push button operation reception period. Since the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated every time the first push button or the second push button is operated, the player can change the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation reception period. The meter for continuous hits fills up faster (final mode) than when only one of them is hit repeatedly.

  In the notice effect and the notice effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29A, 29B, 32A, and 32B, the player accepts the push button operation reception period. In the case where only one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed for a long time, if the automatic continuous hit is established based on the long press of the first push button or the second push button, the first push button or the second push button The display of the meter corresponding to continuous hitting is gradually updated on the condition that the button is continuously pressed, and a predetermined period (for example, for example, after the player starts pressing the first push button or the second push button) 29 (A), 29 (B), 32 (A), and 32 (B), the long stroke period L1) has elapsed, and the meter corresponding to repeated hits finally becomes full (final mode). Become.

  Also, in the notice effect and the notice effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27A, 30A, and 33A, the player is the first during the push button operation acceptance period. When both the push button and the second push button are pressed for a long time, the auto is performed in the same period as when the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation reception period. The display of the meter corresponding to repeated hitting is gradually updated on the condition that continuous hitting is established and both long presses of the first push button and the second push button are continued. Based on the fact that a predetermined period (for example, the long press period L1 shown in FIGS. 30A and 33A) has elapsed since the start of both long presses with the second push button, Meter is full (final aspect). That is, in the notice effect and the notice effect of the present embodiment, when the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation reception period, the player pushes the push button. It is considered that either one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed for a long time during the operation acceptance period, and the player pushes the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. The automatic repetitive strike determination is performed at the same speed as when one of the buttons is pressed and held, and the player holds either the first push button or the second push button during the push button operation reception period. The meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated to the full tank (final mode) at the same speed as the case of pressing.

  In the notice effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, when one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed long, the other long press is executed (FIG. 30B). ) Is an example of a mode in which the second push button is pressed long after the first push button is pressed.) In the case of switching to the other long press before the automatic continuous hit is established by one long press, The judgment is redone. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 30 (B), after performing automatic continuous hitting according to the long press of one of the first push button and the second push button, according to the other long press. When switching to the execution of automatic continuous hitting, the value of the automatic repeated hitting counter is reset to “0” at the time of switching the push button to be long-pressed, so either the first push button or the second push button is selected. The number of automatic continuous hits during the period in which either one is long pressed (long pressing period L2 shown in FIG. 30B; L1> L2) and the period in which the other is long pressed (long pressing period shown in FIG. 30B) L3; even if the sum of the number of automatic hits in L1> L3) has reached the number of automatic hits in the predetermined period (long press period L1), the meter corresponding to repeated hits will not be updated to the full tank (final mode). .

  However, in the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, when one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed long, the other long press is executed (FIG. 33). (B) shows an example in which the second push button is pressed for a long time after the first push button is pressed). When switching to the other long press before the automatic continuous hit is established by one long press, The judgment of repeated hitting can be taken over. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 33 (B), after the automatic continuous hitting according to the long press of one of the first push button and the second push button, the other long press is performed. When switching to execution of automatic continuous hitting, the value of the automatic continuous hitting counter is not reset to “0” even if the long-press target pushbutton is changed, so either the first push button or the second push button is selected. The number of automatic continuous hits during a period in which the button is pressed (long press period L2 shown in FIG. 30 (B)) and the number of automatic hits in the period during which the other button is pressed (long press period L3 shown in FIG. 30 (B)) When the sum of and reaches the number of automatic repeated hits in a predetermined period (long press period L1), the meter for continuous hits is updated to full (final mode).

  In addition, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits in the notification effect is a meter that is updated to a full tank (final mode) by a specific number of times (for example, 20 times) of the first push button or the second push button or an automatic continuous hit for a specific number of times, Since the first continuous hit is counted at the timing when the long push of the first push button or the second push button is started, either one of the first push button and the second push button is pushed long over the long push period L2. If the other is held down for the long press period L3, then only one of the first push button and the second push button is pushed at a timing earlier than the case where the long press is held for the long press period L1. The meter for continuous hits is updated to full (final mode).

  Further, when focusing on the case where the player operates the first push button and the case where the second push button is operated during each production, as shown in FIG. 27B, the player pushes the first push button. When the button is operated, since the first push button includes a button LED (not shown) and a vibration motor (not shown), the button LED emits light and vibrates when driven by the vibration motor. On the other hand, when the player operates the second push button, the second push button does not include a member corresponding to the button LED and the vibration motor, and thus does not emit light or vibrate. In other words, when the vibration motor vibrates by its own drive, the player can strongly sense the vibration of the vibration motor by operating the first push button, while the vibration of the vibration motor can be detected by the game frame. Since a part of the vibration is transmitted to the second push button, the player can sense the vibration of the vibration motor more weakly by operating the second push button than when the first push button is operated.

  However, when the player pushes the first push button for a long time and when the second push button is held for a long time, the same determination value (automatic hitting determination value) is used, so the player pushes the first push button. The interval at which auto-strike is established (long press determination interval) is the same (for example, 0.2 seconds shown in FIG. 27B) when the button is pressed and when the second push button is pressed. It has become.

  That is, as described above, after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval in the notice effect, the long press determination interval. In the case where the second push button is pressed for a long second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the total of the first period and the second period reaches the long press determination interval. Therefore, automatic continuous hitting is not executed, and the display mode of the continuous hitting meter is not updated.

  On the other hand, in the notification effect, the player presses the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval and then the second press shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the automatic repeated hitting is performed based on the fact that the sum of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. This is executed, and the display mode of the meter for continuous hitting is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), an example in which the long press determination can be taken over in the notification effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the notification effect, it is possible to invalidate the takeover of the long press determination as in the case of the notification effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first period in the present invention is 0.15 seconds and the second period is 0.05 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period may be the same length.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect and the notice effect, the player can repeatedly hit by automatic hitting based on long pressing of both the first push button and the second push button. In the case of updating the display mode of the meter and in the case of updating the display mode of the meter corresponding to continuous hitting by automatic continuous hitting based on the player pressing and holding only one of the first push button and the second push button, As shown in FIGS. 22, 23, 25, and 26, every interrupt, regardless of whether both the first push button and the second push button are long-pressed or only one is long-pressed. Since the value of the auto-attack counter is always incremented by 1, only when the player holds down both the first push button and the second push button for a long time, the player Gerhard buttons and updating speed of barrage corresponding meter in the case of pressing only one of the heads of the second push button are the same.

  On the other hand, when the player updates both the first push button and the second push button to update the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits, either the first push button or the second push button In the case where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by repeatedly hitting only, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, the operation of the first push button and the second push button is always performed at every interruption. Since the value of the counter for the number of consecutive hits is incremented by 1 for each case, the player only hits both the first push button and the second push button, and the player only has one of the first push button and the second push button. In the case of repeatedly hitting, the meter corresponding to the repeated hitting can be updated faster when the player hits both the first push button and the second push button repeatedly.As described above, in this embodiment, the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is made different depending on whether the player's operation detected by the first push button and the second push button is repeated hits or long presses. It is possible to improve the effect of the notice effect and the notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the player long-presses both the first push button and the second push button, and when the player long-presses only one of the first push button and the second push button. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player long presses both the first push button and the second push button. The renewal speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be different between the case where the player presses and the case where the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player strikes both the first push button and the second push button repeatedly, and when the player strikes only one of the first push button and the second push button repeatedly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the player repeatedly strikes both the first push button and the second push button and the game are illustrated. The update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be the same in the case where the person hits only one of the first push button and the second push button repeatedly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player long-presses both the first push button and the second push button, and when the player long-presses only one of the first push button and the second push button. In the case where the update “speed” of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is made the same, and when the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button, the player sets the first push button and the second push button. Although an example in which the update “speed” of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is made different in the case where only one is repeatedly hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player pushes the first push button and the second push When both the buttons are pressed and when the player presses only one of the first push button and the second push button, an image (image A or image B in the notice effect, The “rapidity” until the display of the probability change notification image or the non-probability change notification image in the intellectual effect is made the same, and the player makes both first and second push buttons and the player When only one of the first push button and the second push button is repeatedly hit, an image (image A or image B in the notice effect, a probability change notification image or a non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9. You may vary the "speed" until That is, in the “fastness” in the present invention, in addition to “speed (update speed)” in which the meter for continuous hitting is updated by the operation of the first push button or the second push button, the first push button or the second push button The “speed (period until image display)” until the image (image A or image B in the notice effect, the probability change notification image or the non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9 is included. It is.

  Further, in the notice effect and the notice effect, when the player presses and holds only the first push button for a long time and when only the second push button is held for a long time, as shown in FIG. Since the interval (long press determination interval) to be performed is the same as 0.2 seconds, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the player continuously hitting only the first push button. In the case where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by automatic repeated hitting based on the player pressing and holding only the second push button, the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the same. Can be easily understood by the player, and the effect of the notice effect and the notice effect can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the renewal speed of the meter corresponding to continuous hitting is the same when the player presses and holds only the first push button for a long time and when only the second push button is pressed and pressed is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the renewal speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits differs depending on whether the player presses and holds only the first push button for a long time. You may do it.

  Further, after the player pushes the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval in the notice effect, the second period is shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed for a long time (for example, 0.05 seconds), automatic continuous hitting is executed even though the sum of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. Since the display mode of the meter for continuous hits is not updated, it is easy to understand that the update of the display mode of the meter for continuous hits will not start by changing the push button that the player presses and holds, so the notice effect The production effect can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, in the notice effect, the player presses the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed for a longer second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long push period of the first push button is not inherited for the long push of the second push button. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press after the player presses the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the notice effect. When the second push button is long pressed over a second period shorter than the determination interval, the long push period of the first push button may be taken over by the long push of the second push button.

  Further, in the notification effect, after the player pushes the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, the second period is shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed for a long time (for example, 0.05 seconds), the automatic continuous hit is executed according to the sum of the first period and the second period reaching the long press determination interval. And since the display mode of the meter corresponding to continuous hitting is updated, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then the long press determination interval. In the case where the second push button is long pressed over a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long push period of the first push button is taken over as the long push of the second push button. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination is made after the player has long pressed the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the notification effect. When the second push button is long pressed over a second period shorter than the interval, the long push period of the first push button may not be taken over for the long push of the second push button.

  Further, in the notice effect and the notification effect of the present embodiment, the image of the first push button or the first push as an operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 during the operation reception period of the first push button or the second push button. By displaying a message that prompts the user to operate the button (continuous hit), the player can be prompted to operate the first push button, and the effect of the announcement effect or the notification effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the first push button of the present embodiment has a built-in vibration motor, and when the first push button is operated in the notice effect or the notification effect, the first push button is driven by the vibration motor (vibration). While the button vibrates, the second push button does not vibrate because the vibration motor does not drive (vibrates) when the second push button is operated in the notice effect or the notification effect, that is, the first push. Since the intensity of vibration differs between the button and the second push button, it is possible to enhance the effect of the announcement effect or the notification effect.

  In the present embodiment, “the vibration intensity is different”, the first push button is vibrated by the drive (vibration) of the built-in vibration motor, and the second push button is not vibrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the vibration motor is driven (vibrated) according to the operation of the second push button, and the vibration generated by the vibration motor is transmitted to the transmission second push button. The push button may vibrate weaker than the first push button.

  In the present embodiment, the first push button has a built-in vibration motor and the second push button has no built-in vibration motor. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the vibration motor is built in the push button, the vibration motor is not built in the first push button, and when the player pushes the second push button, the player pushes the first push button. Alternatively, the second push button may vibrate more strongly.

  In the present embodiment, the first push button has a built-in vibration motor and the second push button has no built-in vibration motor. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A vibration motor may be incorporated in both the push button and the second push button. When the vibration motor is built in both the first push button and the second push button in this way, the performance of the vibration motor built in the first push button and the vibration motor built in the second push button. The vibration strengths of the first push button and the second push button may be different from each other.

  In the present embodiment, in the notice effect or the notice effect, if the first push button or the second push button is in the operation acceptance period, the player pushes the first push button or the second push button long. Although the form which updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by the automatic hitting corresponding to the push is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation reception period of the first push button or the second push button is not limited thereto. Even if the operation of the first push button or the operation of the second push button by the player is detected after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the operation reception period, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits May not be updated until the final mode is updated. By doing in this way, even if it is during the operation reception period of the 1st push button or the 2nd push button, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hitting is the final mode by the automatic repeated hitting by the long push of the 1st push button or the 2nd push button. Since the case where it is updated toward the case where it is not updated and the case where it is not renewed can be provided, game entertainment can be improved. If the player operates the first push button or the second push button from the start of the operation acceptance period until the predetermined period elapses, a meter corresponding to repeated hits is used by automatic repeated hits as in the present embodiment. The display mode may be updated to the final mode.

  In the present invention, as an example of “the first effect relating to the first detection means is stronger than the first effect relating to the second detection means”, the “first push button image illustrated in the present embodiment is exemplified. In addition to the form in which the image is displayed while the second push button image is not displayed, a form in which “the image of the second push button is displayed smaller than the image of the first push button” is included. Similarly, as an example of “the second effect relating to the first detecting means is stronger than the second effect relating to the second detecting means”, the “message for prompting the operation of the first push button” illustrated in the present embodiment is exemplified. In addition to the form of displaying but not displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button, the form of “displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button smaller than the message prompting the first push button” Contains. Further, as the effect intensity in the present invention, the size and presence of the image displayed on the effect display device 9, the size and presence of the sound volume output from the speaker 27, the amount of light output from the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28 Including the strength and presence of

  In addition, when applying the configuration shown in the present embodiment to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed simultaneously during auto-striking In addition, the luminance or volume may be adjusted by giving priority to either luminance or volume according to the same processing as in the first embodiment. Further, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time immediately after the operation of the stick controller, the first push button, and the second push button, any of the operation means is operated. It may be configured to adjust the luminance or the volume by giving priority to either the luminance or the volume depending on whether it is performed immediately after. In this case, for example, it is configured to prioritize the brightness adjustment immediately after the stick controller tilting operation is performed, or immediately after the pressing operation of the first push button or the second push button is performed. For example, the volume adjustment may be performed with priority.

  Note that a gaming machine can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations described in the first to second embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above embodiments, for example, a plurality of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, a production symbol, and a plurality of types of normal symbols “○” and “×” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed. However, the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and encloses a game medium such as a game ball to give a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, the upward pressing operation portion 130a and the down-pressing operation portion 130a of the cross key 130). Direction operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume based on the operation to the volume adjustment operation unit. Adjustment means (for example, a part for executing step S800A in the production control microcomputer 100) capable of executing adjustment processing and brightness adjustment processing based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. Priority is given to the process of lowering the volume when an operation to lower the volume by the volume adjustment operation means and an operation to increase the brightness by the brightness adjustment operation means are performed. (For example, a part for executing steps S4009 and S4010 in the production control microcomputer 100; see processing at timing T1 shown in FIG. 20), and further detecting means (for example, push sensor) capable of detecting the player's action 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.), promotion display executing means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203) and the like, which are capable of executing the promotion display for encouraging the player's operation, and detection means Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character effect effect, etc.) based on the detection result, and the specific effect executing means is at least a first specific effect. (For example, the first character role action effect etc.) is different from the first specific effect. A second specific effect (for example, a second character accessory action effect or the like) can be executed, and the promotion display executing means uses a first promotion display (indicating that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display). For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the button display 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905, and the second specific effect is suggested. A gaming machine that can execute two-promotion display (for example, an effect in which a button image 90201 and a second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 47C-3). .

  According to such a configuration, when an operation for decreasing the volume and an operation for increasing the brightness are performed, the process for decreasing the volume is performed with priority, and the process for adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered. Further, since it is suggested that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game effect.

  Alternatively, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, the upward pressing operation unit 130a of the cross key 130). And a downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction press operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation unit. Adjusting means (for example, a part for executing step S800A in the production control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process for performing volume adjustment and a process for performing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. The means reduces the brightness when an operation for decreasing the brightness by the brightness adjustment operation means and an operation for increasing the volume by the volume adjustment operation means are performed. Preferentially executed (for example, a part for executing steps S4011, S4012 in the production control microcomputer 100; see processing at timing T2 shown in FIG. 20), and further detecting means (for example, detecting the player's action) , Push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and promotion display execution means (for example, an image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 and a controller image 90203) capable of executing a promotion display for encouraging the player's operation. Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 9012) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a character role effect, etc.) based on the detection result of the detection means, and the specific effect executing means is at least 1 specific performance (for example, the first character role action performance) and the first specific performance A second specific effect (for example, a second character accessory action effect or the like) different from the above can be executed, and the promotion display execution means suggests that the first specific effect is executed as the promotion display. Promotion display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), an effect in which the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905) and the second specific effect are executed. A gaming machine capable of executing a suggested second promotion display (for example, an effect in which a button image 90201 and a second character image 90212 are displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 47C-3). Is mentioned.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation for increasing the volume and an operation for decreasing the brightness are performed, the process for decreasing the brightness is performed with priority, and the process for adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered. Further, since it is suggested that a specific effect is performed in the promotion display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game effect.

  Note that an operation unit (for example, a cross key 130) for performing volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, and an operation unit (for example, a stick controller 9031A or a push button 9031B) as an object of an operation performed by the player for executing a specific effect. May be constituted by separate operation means or by common operation means. If configured with separate operation means, it is possible to suitably cope with a case where the player wants to perform volume adjustment or brightness adjustment during a period in which a promotion display for prompting the player's action is performed (that is, the operation effective period). . In addition, when configured with a common operating means, the number of parts can be reduced and costs can be reduced as compared with a case of configuring with separate operating means. In the case of a configuration with a common operation means, the player's movement is controlled so that volume adjustment and brightness adjustment cannot be performed during a period during which the promotion display for prompting the player's action is performed (that is, the operation effective period). It is desirable to prevent erroneous operations (such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment being performed against the player's will).

  In addition, as an example of a gaming machine that can prevent the effect of the performance from being lowered and that can improve the interest of the game production, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) 901) that is capable of detecting a player's action (for example, push sensor 9035B, controller sensor unit 9035A, etc.) and a promotion display executing means that can execute a promotion display that prompts the player's action (for example, , An image display device 905 capable of displaying a button image 90201 and a controller image 90203) and a specific effect executing means (for example, a character effect effect, etc.) based on the detection result of the detecting means (for example, character effect effect). And the effect control board 9012), and the specific effect execution means is at least a first specific effect (for example, a first character). And the second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, the second character accessory operation effect, etc.). As shown in FIG. 45C-2, for example, a button image 90201 and a first character image 90211 are displayed on the image display device 905, which suggests that the first specific effect is executed. Effect) and a second accelerated display (for example, as shown in FIG. 47C-3) suggesting that the second specific effect is executed, the button image 90201 and the second character image are displayed on the image display device 905. A game machine capable of executing an effect such as 90212 is displayed. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and a plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other in a special game as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol which is the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In a decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, Variations of the decorative symbols are started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or a special graphic using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. It should be noted that, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols, the display of identification information such as decorative symbols is stopped and variable display is terminated. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed, and the pachinko machine 901 When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled to the big hit game state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

  For example, when the start condition for the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes through the first start prize opening, If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize that the game ball passes through the second start prize opening, 2 If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second special condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1, and the second special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. 1 is subtracted from the number stored in the second special figure hold.

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 34, together with the start winning memory display area 905H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, respectively. .

  As shown in FIG. 34, a first character combination 9061 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end in the display area of the image display device 905. The first character combination 9061 can be moved downward from the upper end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the first character combination motor 9071 shown in FIG. At the same time, rotation (spinning) is possible at the operated position. Hereinafter, the position where the first character combination 9061 near the upper end in the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a first character combination first position P9011. The position where the first character combination 9061 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a first character combination second position P9012. Near the left end of the display area of the image display device 905, a second character combination 9062 is arranged. The second character role 9062 can be moved slightly upward from the left end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the second character role motor 9072 shown in FIG. At the same time, it can be rotated (rotated) at the operated position. Hereinafter, the position where the second character combination 9062 near the left end in the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a second character combination first position P9021. The position where the second character combination 9062 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a second character combination second position P9022. In the vicinity of the right end in the display area of the image display device 905, a third character combination 9063 is arranged. The third character combination 9063 can be moved slightly upward from the left end of the image display device 905 toward the inside of the display area of the image display device 905 by driving the third character combination motor 9073 shown in FIG. At the same time, it can be rotated (rotated) at the operated position. Hereinafter, the position where the third character combination 9063 near the right end in the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a third character combination first position P9031. The position where the third character combination 9063 is arranged inside the display area of the image display device 905 is referred to as a third character combination second position P9032.

  In the following description, the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 may be collectively referred to as “character combination”. The first character combination first position P9011 to the third character combination first position P9031 may be collectively referred to as “character combination first position”, and the first character combination second position P9012 to the third character may be referred to as “character combination first position”. The combination second position P9032 may be collectively referred to as “character combination second position”.

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. An ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. And forming a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball enters the second start winning opening. It becomes a state. It should be noted that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B can enter the second start winning opening even when in the closed state, but has a lower possibility of entering the gaming ball than in the open state. You may comprise as follows. As described above, the game area is provided with the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the first special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, if a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the second start The condition is met.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door shown in FIG. 35, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the special prize opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and prevents the game ball from passing through the big winning opening. . On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9082 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily passes through the large winning opening. To do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass and advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, for example, when the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 907 is closed or partially closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by passing the gaming ball through the special prize opening. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed so that it can be changed. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game. Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. A dish is provided. A lower plate is provided below the gaming machine frame 903 so that excess balls overflowing from the upper plate can be discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The member that forms the lower plate can be tilted in the rear, front, left, right direction by the player holding it, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). A possible stick controller 9031A is attached. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 35) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body in the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the controller sensor unit 9035A includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 35) for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the upper plate main body at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 35 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 controls the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure by performing lighting / extinguishing control of each LED constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A function for controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by performing on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020, etc. ing.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. , And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays all or part of the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, game effect lamps 909, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit for performing on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the main board 9011 is connected to wirings for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, starter switches 9022A and 9022B, and a count switch 9023. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 9011 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. It is sufficient that the first bit of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0” in advance.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing game control programs and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. The CPU 90103 is configured to execute a control program by executing a game control program, the random number circuit 90104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and the I / O 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 90100 only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, the random number circuit 90104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 for updating numerical data indicating random values independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. In addition, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action for the stick controller 9031A has been detected, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 9035B an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 9012, a first character role motor 9071 to drive a third character role motor 9073 for operating and rotating the first character role 9061 to the third character role 9063, respectively. Wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 9016 is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 90120. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effects display by determining the switching timing of the effect image displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, LCD drive circuit, or the like may be mounted on the display control unit 90123. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  An I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, an output port of the I / O 90125 outputs a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014, and the like. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hitting ball launching device based on a predetermined operation by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of a housing in a pachinko gaming machine 901 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first start is performed by detecting the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The condition is met. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the second start condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. To do. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the closed state as the second state, it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 35, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9020 is established. Thereafter, the general symbol display device 9020 starts the general symbol game on the basis of the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, for example, that the previous general symbol game has ended, is established. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the opening control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted, and the predetermined time is When it passes, the closing control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started Whether or not to make the symbol variable display result a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged in the display area of the image display device 905 In the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols different from the special symbols is performed.

  In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 905 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. As a special symbol variable display result, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lose symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. Moreover, the special symbol of the lighting pattern having a specific meaning as a number or symbol is not limited to the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. For example, the special symbol of the arbitrary lighting pattern in the 7-segment LED can be the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. It is good.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous for the player. Then, in a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening and a winning ball is generated, a round game in which the big prize opening is continuously opened is executed. During a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the big winning opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when a jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the jackpot type becomes “non-probable”, and when a jackpot symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to be the first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the jackpot game state. A regular round of time is performed. As a round game in the big hit game state, a big hit type in which a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state is relatively short may be executed. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability display may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as a predetermined number of variable displays is executed or the next big hit gaming state is started. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. . As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit game state is ended, the game state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probability changing state or the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is changed between the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening as compared with the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls that the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol game is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal symbol game is “per normal symbol” The tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal figure" compared to the normal state The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B may be changed to the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode by the control for increasing the length of time and the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control. By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained.

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode means that the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitute a part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. The display pattern in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating in the remaining decorative symbol display areas that are not stopped, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” In the display mode, the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the decorative pattern variation speed is reduced, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, or the display mode of the background image is changed. In some cases, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach mode may be executed by changing the display mode of the moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variable display mode of the decorative design. Such an effect operation such as the display of the character image, the change in the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change in the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a reach effect display. In addition, the reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the above.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And the possibility of being a “big hit” varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which one of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B are preset. In normal, so-called normal reach (normal reach production) is executed, and in super A and super B, normal reach is executed and then super reach (super reach production) is executed. The transition from normal reach to super reach at this time is also called development to super reach. When a reach effect including a super reach such as Super A or Super B is executed, the possibility that the variable display result is a “hit” is higher than when a normal reach effect is executed. Further, among reach effects including super reach, when a specific reach effect such as Super B is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the reach effect of Super A is executed.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) ) (Probability that the effect will be executed) × (probability not to be a big hit)}.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, unlike the reach effect, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, an audio output, a lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 or the decoration LED, etc. For example, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display mode may be a reach mode, or that the variable display result may be a “hit”, by an effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance of the advantage of the game executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. As long as it is executed before the reach mode is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when such a notice effect is executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any effect that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In this embodiment, the character role effect driven by the first character role 9061 to the third character role 9063 is set to be executable. The character combination effect is an effect that a part or all of the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 is driven. There is a possibility that the character combination effect is executed in the super reach effect of Super B. In the super B reach effect, the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. The character role effect is after the normal reach is finished, immediately before the super reach effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the super reach development) and immediately before the definitive decorative symbol resulting in the variable display result is derived (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot result notification). )) Or both. When the character combination effect is executed, it is more likely that the variable display result will be a “hit” than when the character combination effect is not executed at the same timing.

  The character role effect includes a first character role motion effect as a character role motion effect to a third character role motion effect, and a first character role rotation effect as a character role rotation effect to a third character role. There is a product rotation effect. In the character actor motion effect, the character actor moves from the character actor first position to the character actor second position, or the character actor moves from the character actor second position to the character actor first position. There is a production.

  Specifically, as the first character combination action effect, the first character combination 9061 moves from the first character combination first position P9011 to the first character combination second position P9012, and the first character combination. There is an effect that 9061 operates from the first character combination second position P9012 to the first character combination first position P9011. As the second character combination action effect, the second character combination 9062 is an operation in which the second character combination 9062 moves from the second character combination first position P9021 to the second character combination second position P9022. There is an effect of operating from the character combination second position P9022 to the second character combination first position P9021. As the third character combination action effect, the third character combination 9063 is an operation in which the third character combination 9063 moves from the third character combination first position P9031 to the third character combination second position P9032, and the third character combination 9063 is third. There is an effect of operating from the character combination second position P9032 to the third character combination first position P9031.

  The character role rotation effect includes an effect in which the character role rotates (rotates) at the character role second position. Specifically, the first character combination rotation effect includes an effect in which the first character combination 9061 rotates at the first character combination second position P9012. As the second character role rotation effect, there is an effect in which the second character role 9062 rotates at the second character role second position P9022. As the third character combination rotation effect, there is an effect in which the third character combination 9063 rotates at the third character combination second position P9032.

  In this embodiment, during the development of super reach, the first character combination action production to the third character combination action production may be executed. In addition, when the big hit result is notified, the first character role action effect to the third character role action effect and the first character role effect effect to the third character role effect may be executed.

  Before the character combination effect is executed, a button image or a controller image may be displayed. In the display effect of the button image, a button image imitating the push button 9031B and a controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A are displayed on the image display device 905 together with the validity period bar. By displaying the button image or the controller image as a promotion display, the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A is promoted to the player.

  The validity period bar indicates an operation validity period during which the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9041A is valid, and becomes shorter as time elapses. When the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A are operated within the operation valid period, the effect control board 9012 accepts these operations. Further, the effect control board 9012 does not accept the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A except for the period for accepting the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A in the period other than the operation effective period. The character combination effect and button image display will be further described later.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the character effect effect described above, various notice effects such as a step-up notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc. are provided as the notice effect that informs that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A notice effect, a group notice effect, a background notice effect, a roll notice effect, etc. are executed. The effect mode of the step-up notice effect is an effect mode in which a plurality of steps are prepared, and is an effect mode in which the prepared steps are advanced to a predetermined level. In the step-up notice effect, for example, as the step proceeds, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases. The effect form of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is an effect aspect that makes it appear as if the variable display is continuously performed a plurality of times in one variable display. The effect form of the group notice effect is an effect aspect in which a specific character or the like is displayed as a group across or jumping out of the image display device 905. There may be one type or a plurality of types of specific characters displayed as a group in the group notice effect. The effect aspect of the background notice effect is an effect aspect in which the background displayed on the image display device 905 changes. The effect form of the hitting notice effect is an effect aspect in which a decorative symbol or the like is given. In the notice effect, these effect modes may be combined and executed.

  These notice effects are not limited to those by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905, and may include any effect operations using various effect devices. As an example of the notice effect different from the image display, an effect that the display color of the decoration LED changes may be an effect that outputs a sound as a special sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to or in place of some or all of these notice effects, a combination of some or all of lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, display of effect images, and output of sound effects It may be controlled to execute the notice effect. In addition, the variable display result is “big hit” when a period in which a notice effect that combines a plurality of kinds of effect aspects is included, rather than when a notice effect is executed with only one kind of effect form. The possibility that a predetermined game value such as possibility is given may be increased.

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” It is only necessary that a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols all together.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display form of the decorative pattern does not become the reach form, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display The finalized decorative symbol that is the result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time, and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  The CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, sets the interrupt disabled state, and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. Processing for controlling progress and the like is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation pattern. And a random value MR4 ′ for determining the normal map display result. The random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. The random number MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” as one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” and “probable change”. It is. The random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number value MR4 ′ for determining the normal figure display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is “per normal figure” or “missing the normal figure”. The random value to be used.

  In the special symbol process included in the timer interrupt processing for game control, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B, setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907, etc. in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 9020 to enable variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit an effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). In the start winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B are on. At this time, if the first start opening switch 9022A is on, the special game using the first special view is based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A. A first start winning process for updating the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories, is performed. On the other hand, if the second start opening switch 9022B is on, the special game using the second special view is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B. A second start winning process is performed to update the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories.

  As an example, in the first start winning process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure holding memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of first special figure hold storage has reached the upper limit value, the first start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thereafter, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as reserved data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  In the second start winning process, it is determined whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the second special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value, the second start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Thus, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thereafter, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as reserved data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  After executing the start winning determination processing in step S90101 shown in FIG. And execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit and the second special symbol storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not to start the special game according to 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit”, the variable display result Determined before the derivation is displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. . In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the fluctuation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. The process etc. which measure is included. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the open state for the big winning opening etc. It is included. In this process, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set to “29 seconds” so that the normal opening round is executed. In addition, when “surprise” is provided for the big hit type, if the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, the short-term open round is executed. Good. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the next round game when the upper limit number has not been reached. The process etc. which wait until it is started are included. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, or the like. Processing that waits until the time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to the success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure holding memory number is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 may read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the head area of the second special figure storage part Then, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read (step S90232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning at the second start winning opening in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 36 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9022, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated so as to be subtracted by one, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by one, and the second special figure reserved memory. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit shifts the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved memories may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the special fluctuation figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. That is, the special game may be executed in the order in which the game balls pass through the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second start winning port is associated with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. What is necessary is just to make it memorize | stored in the predetermined area | region of RAM90102, and to specify the order in which starting conditions were satisfied about the special figure game corresponding to each holding data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the head area of the first special figure storage part Then, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read (step S90236). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning in the first start winning opening in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 36 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining a special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “losing”. It only has to be. The CPU 90103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 ′ read from the random number buffer for variation. .

  FIG. 38A shows a determination example of the special figure display result by the process of step S90239. As described above, whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “losing” is determined using the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result or the special figure display result determination table. What is necessary is just to be determined by a ratio. In the determination example shown in FIG. 38A, the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is varied depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. The CPU 90103 may determine that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is “a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time reduction state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, in the jackpot end process in step S90117 shown in FIG. 36, the probability change control for which the probability change control is performed based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability change” or the like. In the state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be in the big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined at a predetermined rate according to the presence or absence of the probability variation control. On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, the assignment of the decision value to the predetermined special symbol display result is different between the case of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the case of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. May be.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90241). Further, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to a determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types. The CPU 90103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 ′ read from the random number buffer for variation.

  FIG. 38B shows an example of determining the jackpot type by the process of step S90242. In this determination example, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change” at a predetermined rate. Depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the determinable jackpot type may be varied, or the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied. As an example, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the big hit type can be determined as “surprise” at a predetermined rate, while when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is “surprise”. May be set so as not to be determined.

  After executing the process of step S90242, the big hit type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S90240 (step S90240; NO), or after executing the process of step S90243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” may be determined as the confirmed special symbol. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in the process of step S90245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S90111 shown in FIG. 36 is executed.

  In step S90235, if the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S90235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S90246), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for designating demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 has been transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Determine. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90111 of FIG. 36 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 39A, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S90261; YES), a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S90262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S90261; NO), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S90263).

  FIG. 39B shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” that does not become the reach mode and “reach” that reaches the reach mode A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 39A, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101, for example. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern determination result depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. It only has to be assigned. The CPU 90103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 ′ for fluctuation pattern determination read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The determined variation pattern may be determined.

  In the process of step S90263 shown in FIG. 39 (A), corresponding to the case of normal time when the gaming state is a normal state and the case of time reduction control in which the gaming state is a certain change state or a time-short state, The variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using any of a plurality of losing variation pattern determination tables prepared in advance. In the plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern determination result, depending on whether it is normal or short in time, or according to the total number of reserved memories. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 90103 refers to any of the loss variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the normal time and the short time based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination read from the variation random number buffer. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” may be determined.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is determined to be “non-reach” at a higher rate than when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number. It is sufficient that a decision value is assigned. In this way, when the number of special figure reservations stored is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the decorative symbol variable display mode may be set to be less likely to be determined as the reach mode than when it is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of special figure hold memory is relatively large, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the number of special figure storage is relatively small, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings can be suppressed. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 40A shows an example of determining the variation pattern at the time of big hit. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA3′-1 is executed is the reach effect in which the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation patterns PA3′-2 and PA3′-3. It is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 40B shows an example of determining a variation pattern at the time of loss. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA2′-1 is executed is the reach effect in which the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation patterns PA2′-2 and PA2′-3. It is set to be higher than the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern.

  Further, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set to be higher than that at the time of losing. Accordingly, when the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 40A, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super B reach effect such as the variation pattern PA3'-3 is executed is the super A reach effect such as the variation pattern PA3'-2. It is set to be higher than the determination ratio of the variation pattern to be performed. On the other hand, in the determination example shown in FIG. 40B, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super B reach effect such as the variation pattern PA2'-3 is executed is the super A reach effect such as the variation pattern PA2'-2. Is set to be lower than the determination ratio of the variation pattern to be executed. Further, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super B reach effect is executed is set to be sufficiently higher than that at the time of losing. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is obtained after the reach effect of Super B is executed at a higher rate than when the big hit gaming state is not achieved. Derived.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (B), the variation patterns PA2′-1 to PA2′-3 and the variation patterns PA3′-1 to PA3′-3 have the same special diagram variation time and content. The variable display result is different from “losing” or “big hit”. 40A and 40B, when the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, the normal reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, and the big hit is more than when the super reach effect is not executed after the normal reach effect. Expectation is increased. Further, when the Super B reach effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the Super A reach effect is executed.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90262 and S90263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S90264). The special symbol variation time that becomes the variable display time of the special symbol is a time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 39 (B), the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 90103 can set the timing at which a variable symbol display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is derived by setting a special symbol variation time.

  Following the processing of step S90264, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games in which the condition is satisfied (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  After the process of step S90265 is executed, command transmission setting at the start of the special symbol variation is performed (step S90266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  As the first variation start command and the second variation start command, the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B are used. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 in response to variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S90267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” in step S90267, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S90112 shown in FIG. 36 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, sets the register of the CTC mounted on the effect control board 9012, and the like. . Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as a display operation of an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed, and numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by a random counter in the RAM 90122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the following processes in steps S90170 to S90176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process performs variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 905 based on whether the first change start command or the second change start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 905 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process includes the process of determining the final decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read out from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and various effects during the variable display of the decorative design. A process for performing the control is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to be included. It should be noted that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the confirmed decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped manner. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the jackpot gaming state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, and the like. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the special figure display result corresponds to “losing” If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect for notifying the start of a jackpot gaming state based on the reception of a jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Then, when the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED are turned on / off / flashing by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed. Further, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the value of the production process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED are turned on / off / flashing by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final decorative symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the change start time determination contents such as the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The final stop symbol is determined. In this embodiment, the determination contents at the start of variation according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include “non-reach (losing)”, “reach (losing)”, “non-probability variation (big hit)”, “probability variation ( "Big hit)".

  FIG. 42 (B) shows an example of determining a decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol in the process of step S90401. In this example, when the variation start determination content is “non-reach (losing)”, different decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 90124 or an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to the prepared left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium-decorated decorative design updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  When the change determination content is “reach (losing)”, the same decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. By referring to the design pattern, the design pattern with the same design number that is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” design pattern display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is prepared. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the middle decorative pattern becomes the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol, if the final decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, any value May be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set.

  When the content of the determination at the start of variation is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, the same is applied to the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The decorative design is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 905C and 905R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, or whether or not the promotion effect during the jackpot is executed, the normal symbol or the probable symbol is used as the confirmed decorative symbol. It may be determined. Specifically, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, a symbol to be a confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the jackpot type is “probability change” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes a definite decoration symbol is determined from a plurality of types of probability change symbols. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot promotion effect is to be executed even if the jackpot type is “probability change”, the determined symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S90401, whether or not to execute a probability change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect when the content of determination at the start of variation is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”. It may be determined. In the re-drawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state. It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability change state by variably displaying the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. In addition, there is a case where the control of the probability variation state is not notified by stopping the display of the decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination after changing the decorative symbol again in the re-lottery effect. Moreover, what is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that it is controlled to a probability change state by performing promotion effect during a big hit at the time of a big hit game state or completion | finish of a big hit game state. If it is determined in step S90401 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, the effect control CPU 90120 performs character combination effect determination processing (step S90402). FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90402 of FIG. 42A as the character accessory effect determination process. In the character combination effect determination process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first performs a super reach development character combination effect determination process (step S90501). In the super-reach development character role effect determination process, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 stores in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 as a use table for determining the character role effect at the time of super-reach development. The prepared super-reach development character role effect determination table shown in FIG. 44 (A) is selected and set. In the character reach effect determination table at the time of super reach development, for example, whether or not the character role effect is executed at the time of super reach development, or the character to be operated is the first character role when the character role effect is executed. The object 9061 to the third character combination 9063 is determined. Whether or not the character role effect is executed and the character selection at the time of execution are selected as a change pattern PA3′− in which the super reach effect is executed when the change pattern is Super B and the variable display result is “big hit”. 3 or a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the character effect presentation, depending on whether the variable reach result is a “losing” variable display result when the super reach effect is executed. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of “no execution”, “third character”, “second character”, or “first character”. “No execution” indicates a pattern in which the character combination effect is not executed, and “third character” indicates that the third character combination operation effect in which the third character combination 9063 operates as the character combination effect is executed. The “second character” indicates a pattern in which the second character combination action production in which the second character combination 9062 operates as the character combination effect, and the “first character” indicates the character combination. The pattern in which the 1st character actor action production in which the 1st character actor 9061 moves is shown as a thing effect is shown.

  The effect control CPU 90120, for example, based on numerical data indicating a random value for character effect effect determination extracted from a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122, etc. By referring to the object effect determination table, when “no execution” is performed at the time of super reach development, or when a character role effect is executed, “third character” “second character” “first character” You only have to decide if it exists.

  FIG. 44 (A) shows a configuration example of the character reach effect determination table at the time of super reach development. In this super reach development character role effect determination table, when the change pattern is the change pattern PA3′-3 in which the super reach effect when the change pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”. , “Non-execution”, “Third character”, “Second character”, “First character”, “Non-execution” is less selected than “Third character”, and “Third character” Is selected lower than “second character”, and “second character” is selected less than “first character” (selection ratio: “no execution” <“first” 3 characters "<" second character "<" first character ").

  Further, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA2′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “lost”, the “first character” is the “first character”. The ratio of “second character” is lower than that of “second character”, the ratio of “second character” is lower than that of “third character”, and “third character” is selected more than “no execution”. (The selection ratio: “first character” <“second character” <“third character” <“no execution”)). Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher for the “third character” than the “no execution”, higher for the “second character” than the “third character”, and “higher” than the “second character”. “One character” is higher (expectation of big hit: “no execution” <“third character” <“second character” <“first character”).

  After executing the process of step S90501, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a button image display determination process at the time of super reach development (step S90502). In the super reach development button image display determination process, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is prepared as a use table for determining the button image display at the time of super reach development by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 in advance. The super reach development button image display determination table shown in FIG. 44B is selected and set. In the super reach development button image display determination table, for example, whether or not a button image is displayed at the time of super reach development, or whether or not a character image is displayed together with the button image when the button image is displayed. decide. The button image display and the character image display are selected based on whether the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA3′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, The numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining button image display at the time of super reach development is “not executed”, depending on whether or not the variation pattern PA2′-3 is “losing” when the reach effect is executed. It is only necessary to be assigned to one of the determination results of “no character” and “with character”. “No execution” indicates a pattern in which a button image is not displayed, “No character” indicates a pattern in which a button image is displayed but no character image is displayed, and “With character” indicates a button image and a character image. Indicates a displayed pattern.

  The effect control CPU 90120 develops the super reach based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the button image display at the time of super reach development extracted from, for example, the random counter 90124 or the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. By referring to the hour button image display determination table, it is determined whether “no execution” or “no character” or “with character” when the button image is displayed when the super reach is developed. do it.

  FIG. 44B shows a configuration example of a button image display determination table at the time of super reach development. In this super reach development button image display determination table, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA3′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, “execute” Of "None", "No character", and "With character", "No execution" is less selected than "No character", and "No character" is selected more than "With character" (Selection ratio: “No execution” <“No character” <“With character”).

  Further, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA2′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “lost”, “with character” is more than “without character”. The ratio of “no character” is lower than that of “no execution” (selection ratio: “with character” <“no character” <“no execution”). Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher for “no character” than “no execution” and higher for “with character” than “no character” (expected big hit: “no execution” < “No character” <“With character”).

  When determining that “there is a character” as the button image display, the effect control CPU 90120 displays on the image display device 905 the image of the character determined by the type of the character effect effect in step S90501. For example, when “third character” is determined as the character role effect type in step S90501, the third character image 90213 is displayed together with the button image 90201 as shown in FIG. Is displayed at 905.

  It should be noted that in step S90501, a button image is displayed depending on whether or not a character role effect is executed (when one of “third character” to “first character” is determined as the character role effect). The display determination ratio may be varied. For example, when the character combination effect is executed (when one of “third character” to “first character” is determined as the character combination effect), the character combination effect is not executed (character The button image is displayed (when either “no character” or “with character” is determined as the button image display) than when “no execution” is determined as the effect rendering) Also good.

  Further, when “with character” is determined as the button image display, the execution of the character combination effect may be confirmed. In other words, when “no execution” is determined as the character accessory effect, “with character” may not be determined as the button image display (the determination ratio is 0).

  After executing the processing of step S90502, the effect control CPU 90120 performs image display determination processing at the time of jackpot result notification (step S90503). In the big hit result notification image display determination process, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 in advance as a use table for determining an image displayed at the time of the big hit result notification. The big hit result notification time image display determination table shown in FIG. 44 (C) is selected and set. In the big hit result notification image display determination table, for example, it is determined whether or not a button image or a controller image is displayed at the time of big hit result notification, or neither of them is displayed. The button image display and the character image display are selected based on whether the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA3′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, The numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the image display at the time of jackpot result notification is “None” or “Now” depending on whether or not the variation pattern PA2′-3 in which the reach effect is executed and the variable display result becomes “losing”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of either “button image” or “controller image”. “None” indicates a pattern in which neither a button image nor a controller image is displayed, “Button image” indicates a pattern in which a button image is displayed, and “Controller image” indicates a pattern in which a controller image is displayed. Is shown.

  The effect control CPU 90120, for example, at the time of jackpot result notification based on the numerical data indicating the random value for image display determination at the time of jackpot result notification extracted from, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122 By referring to the image display determination table, it is only necessary to determine which of “none”, “button image”, and “controller image” when the big hit result is notified.

  FIG. 44 (C) shows a configuration example of the image display determination table at the time of jackpot result notification. In this jackpot result notification time image display determination table, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA3′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, “None”. Of “button image” and “controller image”, “None” is selected less than “button image”, and “button image” is selected less than “controller image”. (Selection ratio: “none” <“button image” <“controller image”).

  Further, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA2′-3 in which the super reach effect when the variation pattern is Super B is executed and the variable display result is “lost”, the “controller” is more than the “button image”. The selection ratio is low, and the selection ratio of “button image” is lower than that of “none” (selection ratio: “controller image” <“button image” <“none”). Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher in the “button image” than in the “none” and higher in the “controller image” than the “button image” (expected big hit: “none” <“button Image "<" controller image ").

  In addition, when displaying a button image or a controller image, the button image or the controller image is clearly displayed. However, a display may be made to indicate whether or not the button image or the controller image is displayed. For example, when a button image or controller image is displayed lightly and the button image or controller image is displayed, and then the button image or controller image is clearly displayed, or when the button image or controller image disappears without displaying the button image or controller image. There may be. Alternatively, the button image and the controller image may be displayed alternately and lightly so as to indicate whether the button image or the controller image is displayed or neither. In this case, for example, even when the button image display is “None”, the button image or the controller image may be displayed in common.

  In this way, when the character combination effect determining process is completed, the process returns to the flow shown in FIG. 42A, and after executing the process of step S90402, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the notice effect determining process (step S90404). In the notice effect determination process, it is determined whether or not a notice effect other than the character effect effect determination process, for example, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo-continuous notice effect, a group notice effect, a background notice effect, a roll notice effect, or the like is executed.

  After executing the process of step S90404, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the effect control pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90406). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 can select any of the special-effects variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the various effects determined by the processing in steps S90402 to S90405. Select and set as the usage pattern.

  After executing the processing of step S90406, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step S90407). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90408). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90406 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative pattern may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided on the display screen.

  Following the process of step S90408, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings for updating the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H are performed (step S90409). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning storage display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90410), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect mode of the character accessory effect. The character role effect may be executed at the time of super reach development and at the time of jackpot result notification. Therefore, first, the character role effect at the time of super reach development will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the character role effect at the time of super reach development. In the special game, as shown in FIG. 45A, the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 are variably displayed. At this time, the first character combination 9061, the second character combination 9062, and the third character combination 9063 are respectively a first character combination first position P9011 and a second character combination first position P9021 shown in FIG. , And the third character combination at the first position P9031.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), a common symbol in the left ornament symbol display area 905L and the right ornament symbol display area 905R, in this case “7” symbol, is stopped and displayed, so that the decorative symbol variable display When the state becomes the reach state, the decorative character “reach!” Is displayed on the image display device 905, and then the normal reach effect is executed. Subsequently, for example, when “no character” has been determined in the super reach development button image display determination process (step S90502) shown in FIG. 43, the super reach development character action effect determination process (step S90502) shown in FIG. Regardless of the content of the determination in S90501), a button image 90201 and an effective period bar 90202 are displayed at the center of the image display device 905, as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when “with character” is determined in the super reach development button image display determination process (step S 90502), as the character reach effect in the super reach development character combination effect determination process (step S 90501), for example, If the “first character” has been determined, a button image 90201 and an effective period bar 90202 are displayed at the center of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. An image 90211 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green.

  Thus, by displaying the button image 90201, the player is encouraged to operate the push button 9031B. Further, by displaying the validity period bar 90202, the player is notified of the operation validity period during which the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B shown in FIG. Further, by displaying the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211, it is suggested that the first character combination action production in which the first character combination 9061 operates is executed, and the big hit expectation is increased. To make players aware that they are, and to raise the expectation for a big hit. Note that if “no execution” is determined in the super-reach development button image display determination process (step S 90502), the determination is made in the super-reach development character role effect determination process (step S 90501). The button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), when the button image 90201 and the first character image 90211 are displayed, the first character image 90211 displays the button image 90201. However, other modes of display may be performed. For example, the first character image 90211 may be simply displayed at the same time as the button image 90201 is displayed, or the button image 90201 is displayed, and the first character image 90211 is displayed after a short period of time has passed. May be. Also, a plurality of these display modes may be provided and displayed in various modes (patterns).

  After the effect shown in FIG. 45 (C-1) or (C-2), when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses, the super reach is developed. If “no execution” is determined in the time character combination effect determination process (step S90501), as shown in FIG. 46 (D-1), the button image 90201, the validity period bar 90202, and further FIG. After (C-2), the image in which the first character image 90211 disappears is erased from the image display device 905, and the erased image 90221 is displayed. Further, the first character combination 9061, the second character combination 9062, and the third character combination 9063 remain stopped.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46E-1, a decoration character “Super Reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made aware that the reach form has evolved from a normal reach production to a super reach production. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46F, the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

  In addition, after the effect shown in FIG. 45 (C-1) or (C-2), when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses, If the “first character” has been determined in the character development effect determination process at the time of reach development (step S90501), as shown in FIG. 46 (D-2), the first character combination 9061 is the first character. A first character combination action effect is performed that moves from the first combination first position P9011 to the first character combination second position P9012. Further, in the image display device 905, if the button image 90201 and the valid period bar 90202 are deleted, and further, FIG. 45 (C-2) is displayed before the display of FIG. 46 (D-2). The first character image 90211 is deleted, and an effect image 90222 that highlights the first character combination 9061 is displayed behind the first character combination second position P9012. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the first character combination 9061 and is displayed behind the first character combination 9061 to make the first character combination 9061 stand out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (E-2), the first character combination 9061 is moved from the first character combination second position P9012 to the first character combination first position P9011. In addition, a decoration character “Super Reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display device 905. The decoration character “Super Reach!” May be displayed after the first character combination 9061 has moved (retracted) to the first character combination first position P9011, or the first character combination 9061 may be displayed. May be displayed during the movement to the first character combination first position P9011. Alternatively, when the first character combination 9061 remains in the first character combination second position P9012, the display of the decoration character “Super Reach!” Is completed, and then the first character combination 9061 is the first character. You may make it move to the accessory 1st position P9011. In this way, the player is made aware that the reach form has evolved from a normal reach production to a super reach production. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46F, the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

  Further, there is a case where “first character” is determined in the super-reach development character role effect determination process (step S90501), and “no execution” is determined in the super-reach development button image display determination process (step S90502). . In this case, the image display device 905 displays an image in the normal reach state shown in FIG. Subsequently, the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed on the image display device 905, and as shown in FIG. 46 (D-2), the first character combination 9061 is the first character combination first. A first character combination action effect that moves from the position P9011 to the first character combination second position P9012 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (E-2), the first character combination 9061 is moved from the first character combination second position P9012 to the first character combination first position P9011. In addition, a decoration character “Super Reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made aware that the reach form has evolved from a normal reach production to a super reach production.

  In addition, in the super-reach development button image display determination process (step S90502), “there is a character” is determined, and in the super-reach development character combination effect determination process (step S90501), the “second character” is determined. In this case: First, as shown in FIG. 45B, “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left ornament symbol display area 905L and the right ornament symbol display area 905R of the image display device 905, and the variable symbol display state becomes the reach state. , “Leach!” Decoration characters are displayed, and normal reach production is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47C-3, a button image 90201 and an effective period bar 90202 are displayed at the center of the image display device 905, and a second character image 90212 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red. Here, the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the second character image 90212 is the same as the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the first character image 90211, as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the second character image 90212 is displayed, which suggests that the second character combination action operation in which the second character combination 9062 moves is performed, and that the big hit expectation is high. To raise awareness of the big hit. Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when the second character combination action presentation is executed is lower than the degree of jackpot expectation when the first character combination action presentation is executed. For this reason, the expectation to the big hit is, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the first character as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2) rather than the case where the second character image 90212 is displayed. The case where the image 90211 is displayed is higher.

  As shown in FIGS. 47C-3 and C-4, when the button image 90201, the second character image 90212, and the third character image 90213 are displayed, the second character image 90212 or the third character is displayed. Although the display in which the image 90213 brings the button image 90201 is performed, another display may be performed. For example, the second character image 90212 or the third character image 90213 may be simply displayed at the same time as the button image 90201 is displayed, or the second character image 90201 is displayed after the validity period has elapsed for a while. 90212 or the third character image 90213 may be displayed. Also, a plurality of these display modes may be provided and displayed in various modes (patterns).

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 45C-2, 47C-3, and C-4, the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 are displayed side by side with the button image 90201. May be displayed in other manners. For example, any one of the first character image to the third character image may be drawn on the button image, or the button image itself may be one of the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063. You may make it become the image imitated.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (D-3), the second character combination 9062 moves from the second character combination first position P9021 to the second character combination second position P9022 shown in FIG. A character accessory action effect is executed. In the image display device 905, the button image 90201 and the validity period bar, and further the second character image 90212 are deleted, and the second character combination 9062 is displayed behind the second character combination second position P9022. A prominent effect image 90222 is displayed. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the second character combination 9062 and is displayed behind the second character combination 9062, thereby making the second character combination 9062 stand out.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (E-3), the second character combination 9062 is moved from the second character combination second position P9022 to the second character combination first position P9021. In addition, a decoration character “Super Reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made aware that the reach form has evolved from a normal reach production to a super reach production. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46F, the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

  In addition, in the super-reach development button image display determination process (step S90502), “there is a character” is determined, and in the super-reach development character combination effect determination process (step S90501), the “third character” is determined. In this case: First, as shown in FIG. 45B, “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left ornament symbol display area 905L and the right ornament symbol display area 905R of the image display device 905, and the variable symbol display state becomes the reach state. , “Leach!” Decoration characters are displayed, and normal reach production is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47C-4, a button image 90201 and an effective period bar 90202 are displayed at the center of the image display device 905, and a third character image 90213 is displayed. At this time, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green. Here, the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the third character image 90213 is the same as the size of the button image 90201 displayed together with the first character image 90211, as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the third character image 90213 is displayed, which suggests that the third character role action action in which the third character role 9063 moves is executed, and the big hit expectation is high. To raise awareness of the big hit. Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when the third character combination action presentation is executed is lower than the degree of jackpot expectation when the second character combination action presentation is executed. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit is, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3), the second character as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3) rather than the case where the third character image 90213 is displayed. The case where the image 90212 is displayed is higher. Furthermore, the expectation for the big hit is that, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the first character image is higher than when the third character image 90213 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4). It is higher when 902111 is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (D-4), the third character combination 9063 moves from the third character combination first position P9031 to the third character combination second position P9032 shown in FIG. A character accessory action effect is executed. Further, in the image display device 905, the button image 90201, the validity period bar, and further the third character image 90213 are erased, and the third character combination 9063 is displayed behind the third character combination second position P9032. A prominent effect image 90222 is displayed. The effect image 90222 corresponds to the third character combination 9063 and is displayed behind the third character combination 9063, thereby making the third character combination 9063 stand out.

  As shown in FIGS. 46D-2, 47D-3, and D-4, the effect image 90222 displayed behind the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 is Although they are common images, they may be different images. For example, as an effect image, an image of each character corresponding to the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 may be displayed, or an item image associated with each character may be displayed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (E-4), the third character combination 9063 is moved from the third character combination second position P9032 to the third character combination first position P9031. In addition, a decoration character “Super Reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display device 905. In this way, the player is made aware that the reach form has evolved from a normal reach production to a super reach production. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46F, the image display device 905 executes a super reach effect.

  Next, the character role effect at the time of the big hit result notification will be described. FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the character effect effect at the time of notifying the big hit result. When the super reach production progresses and enters the final stage, as shown in FIG. 48A, a decorative character “game!” Is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Subsequently, for example, when the “button image” is determined in the image display determination process at the time of jackpot result notification shown in FIG. 43 (step S90503), as shown in FIG. A button image 90201 and an effective period bar 90202 are displayed in the center. If the “controller image” has been determined in the big hit result notification image display determination process (step S90503), the controller image is displayed at the center of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 90203 and a validity period bar 90202 are displayed.

  When the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation effective period after the effect shown in FIG. 48B-1 or the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the effect control CPU 90120 in FIG. As shown in (C), the first character combination 9061 causes the first character combination 901 to move from the first character combination first position P9011 to the first character combination second position P9012. At the same time as this operation, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second character combination 9062 and the third character combination 9063 from the second character combination first position P9021 and the third character combination first position P9031, respectively. The second character role action motion effect and the third character role action effect that move to the object second position P9022 and the third character role second position P9032 are performed. In the image display device 905, the button image 90201 and the validity period bar 90202 are deleted, and the first character combination is behind the first character combination second position P9012 to the third character combination second position P9032. An effect image 90222 that highlights the object 9061 to the third character role 9063 is displayed.

  After the first character combination action production, the second character combination action production, and the third character combination action production are executed, the first character combination second position P9012, the second character combination second position P9022, In the third character combination second position P9032, the first character combination rotation effect to the third character combination rotation effect in which the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 rotate (rotate) respectively are executed. The In this way, by executing the first character role rotation effect to the third character role rotation effect, the sense of expectation for the big hit is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, any one of the effects shown in FIG. 48 (D-1) and FIG. 49 (D-2) is executed. 49A to 49C show steps similar to those in FIGS. 48A to 48C. 48 (D-1) and 49 (D-2), the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 stop rotating, and the first character combination rotation effect to the third character combination. After the object rotation effect is completed, a first character character action effect is executed in which the first character character 9061 moves from the first character character second position P9012 to the first character character first position P9011. Further, the second character combination 9062 and the third character combination 9063 are respectively changed from the second character combination second position P9022 and the third character combination second position P9032 to the second character combination first position P9021 and the third character combination. A second character combination action effect and a third character combination action effect moving to the character combination first position P9031 are executed.

  Then, for example, when determining based on the variation pattern PA3′-3 in the image display determination process (step S90503) at the time of the big hit result notification shown in FIG. 43, as shown in FIG. 48 (D-1), A decorative character “WIN” is displayed together with the first character image 90211. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (E-1), the big hit combination in which the same decorative symbol “7” is aligned in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is stopped and displayed. In this way, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the image display device 905.

  Further, for example, in the big hit result notification image display determination process (step S90503) shown in FIG. 43, when the determination is based on the variation pattern PA2′-3, as shown in FIG. 49 (D-2), A decorative character “LOSE” is displayed together with the enemy character image 90224. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (E-2), different decorative symbols “7”, “6”, and “7” are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, respectively. In this way, a finalized decorative symbol that is a missing symbol combination other than the jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 49 (C), the first to third character accessory action effects are executed, and FIG. As shown in 1), when the decorative character “WIN” is displayed together with the first character image 90211, and the variable display result is “losing”, the first to third character accessory action effects are displayed. May not be performed. When the variable display result is “losing”, the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 do not move or the first to third character combinations shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 49 (C). Instead of an object action effect, an effect dedicated to losing may be performed. As an effect exclusively for losing here, when the effect control board 9012 accepts the operation of the push button 9031B within the operation effective period or when the operation effective period elapses, the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 slightly moves at the first character combination first position P9011 to the third character combination first position P9031, but moves from the first character combination second position P9012 to the third character combination second position P9032. You may make it perform the operation | movement which does not.

  Further, the image including the decorative character “WIN” illustrated in FIG. 48D-1 and the image including the decorative character “LOSE” illustrated in FIG. The display may be started after the character combination 9063 has moved (retracted) to the first character combination first position P9011 to the third character combination first position P9031, or the first character combination 9061 The display may be started while the third character combination 9063 is moving from the first character combination first position P9011 to the third character combination first position P9031. Alternatively, “WIN” or “LOSE” is displayed when the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 remain in the first character combination second position P9012 to the third character combination second position P9032. The display of the image including it may be completed, and you may make it move to the 1st character role 1st position P9011-the 3rd character role 1st position P9031 after that.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the above-described embodiment, the first character combination action effect that causes the first character combination 9061 to operate is different from the first character combination action effect. It is possible to execute a second character combination action effect that moves the character combination 9062. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (C-2), the second character as shown in FIG. 47 (C-3) and the effect in which the first character image 90211 suggesting the first character actor action effect is displayed. It is possible to execute an effect in which a second character image 90212 suggesting a character accessory action effect is displayed. For this reason, since the suggestion with respect to performing a specific effect is performed, the expectation with respect to execution of an effect can be enlarged, and the improvement of an interest can be aimed at.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, in addition to the first character combination action effect that operates the first character combination 9061 and the second character combination action effect that operates the second character combination 9062, the third character A third character accessory action effect that moves the accessory 9063 can be executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47 (C-4), it is possible to execute an effect in which a third character image 90213 suggesting a third character actor action effect is displayed. For this reason, while diversifying the production, the diversified production, here, the third character actor action production is also suggested for the production, so the expectation for the production is greatly increased. Can improve the interest.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, the first character combination 9061 can execute a first character combination rotation effect different from the first character combination operation effect and the first character combination operation effect. Yes. Furthermore, the first character image 90211 can be executed when the first character combination action effect is executed. For this reason, by displaying the first character image 90211, it is possible to increase the expectation for the first character role action effect, and to improve the interest. Further, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, a first character combination action effect and a first character combination rotation effect can also be executed. For this reason, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, in addition to the expectation for the execution of the first character combination act, the expectation for the execution of the first character combination rotation effect can be given. Therefore, the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, the push sensor 9035B and the controller sensor unit 9035A can detect the player's operation on the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A, and the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is displayed on the push button. This is a display that promotes the player to operate the button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A. For this reason, since the operating means to operate can be taught with respect to a player, it can contribute to the improvement of interest. In FIGS. 48 (B-1) and (C-1) in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is displayed without the first character image 90211, the second character image 90212, or the like. However, it may be displayed with the first character image 90211, the second character image 90212, and the like. Further, the controller image 90203 may be displayed at a timing other than the time of the big hit result notification, for example, at the time of super reach development. In addition, when an operation unit corresponding to the displayed image is operated, the detection unit may detect the operation, or when an operation unit other than the operation unit corresponding to the displayed image is operated. Alternatively, the detection means may detect the operation. For example, when the button image 90201 is displayed, the push sensor 9035B detects the operation of the push button 9031B, but the controller sensor unit 9035A does not need to detect the operation of the stick controller 9031A. When displayed, the push sensor 9035B may detect the operation of the push button 9031B, and the controller sensor unit 9035A may detect the operation of the stick controller 9031A.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, the second character image 90212 and the third character image 90213 are not displayed before the first character combination action effect is executed. For this reason, each character role action effect and each character image have a one-to-one correspondence, and the effect to be executed is less likely to be mistaken, so that the effect is executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to enjoy the production by concentrating on the person. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, the effective period bar 90202 indicating the operation effective period in which the effect control board 9012 receives the operation of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A is displayed, and the effective period bar 90202 is the first character. It is different when displayed together with the image 90211 and when displayed together with the second character image 90212. Specifically, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green when displayed together with the first character image 90211, and is displayed in red when displayed together with the second character image 90212. For this reason, attention can also be paid to the effective period bar 90202, so that the interest can be improved.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the first character combination action effect related to the first character among the plurality of characters of the first character to the third character, and the second character combination related to the second character. It is possible to execute an operation effect. Furthermore, when the first character combination action effect is executed, the first character image 90211 related to the first character is displayed, and when the second character combination action effect is executed, the second character is displayed. A second character image 90212 related to is displayed. For this reason, since an effect using a plurality of characters can be executed, the interest can be improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, three characters of the first character to the third character are used. However, a fourth character, a fifth character, etc. may be provided to use four or more characters. .

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, even if the image that is in the normal reach state shown in FIG. As shown in (D-2), there is a case where a first character combination action effect for operating the first character combination 9061 is executed. For this reason, even if the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the character accessory action effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of game effects.

Note that, for example, the jackpot expectation level when the first character role action effect to the third character role effect are executed may be set to increase in the following order (hit expectation level: 1.> 2. >3.>4.>5.> 6.).
1. 1. First character accessory action effect after the character image and the button image are displayed 2. First character accessory action effect after only the button image is displayed 3. Second character accessory action effect after the character image and button image are displayed 4. Second character accessory action effect after only the button image is displayed 5. Third character accessory action effect after the character image and the button image are displayed 3rd character actor action effect after only the button image is displayed

  Further, in the above example, when the third character role effect production is executed, the big hit expectation is lower than when the first character role effect or the second character role effect is executed. There is a concern that people's attention will be lowered. Therefore, when the third character image is displayed, an effect different from the first character accessory action effect or the second character accessory action effect may be executed as the third character accessory action effect. Alternatively, when the third character image is displayed, a character combination effect in which all of the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063 operate may be executed by a subsequent button operation.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  (Modification 1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901 described above, the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 are not displayed at the time of super reach development or at the time of jackpot result notification, but at the time of super reach development or at the time of jackpot result notification In this case, both the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed at different times. For example, when the production control board 9012 receives the operation of the stick controller 9031A, the button image 90201 is displayed during the ineffective period before the operation of the stick controller 9031A is received, and then the effective period starts. A controller image 90203 may be displayed. At this time, after the button image 90201 is displayed, the button image 90201 may be changed to the controller image 90203.

  When the button image 90201 is changed to the controller image 90203, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed after the controller image 90203 is displayed without displaying the validity period bar 90202 while the button image 90201 is displayed. You may make it do. Further, when the button image 90201 is displayed during the ineffective period, the button image 90201 is displayed as a dedicated display during the ineffective period, but an image representing the ineffective period may be displayed. Good. For example, a restriction line may be displayed on the button image 90201 to indicate that the push button operation is not valid.

  Further, the effect control board 9012 may accept an operation of either the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A after the ineffective period. In this case, when the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted after the button image 90201 is displayed during the non-valid period and the valid period is reached, the display of the button image 90201 is continued and the operation of the stick controller 9031A is performed. When accepting, the button image 90201 may be changed to the controller image 90203 for display. In this case, since there is a possibility of transition from a state in which the operation of the push button 9031B is accepted to a state in which the operation of the stick controller 9031A is accepted, it is possible to maintain the player with a sense of expectation that increases the degree of big hit expectation. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the process of changing the button image 90201 to the controller image 90203, an action effect acting on the button image 90201 may be performed, and the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be changed stepwise. For example, as the first stage, the color of the button image 90201 changes from white to red (“button (white)” → “button (red)”), and as the second stage, the button image 90201 changes to a large size (“button ( Red) ”→“ button (large) ”), and it may be changed to the controller image 90203 in the third stage (“ button (red) ”→“ controller ”). Alternatively, the same change is performed up to the third stage, and the button image changes to a small controller image 90203 in the third stage ("button (red)" → "controller (small)"), and the controller in the subsequent fourth stage. The image 90203 may be changed to a normal size (“controller (small)” → “controller”). Such a stepwise change may be performed on the button image 90201, may be performed on the controller image 90203, or may be performed on the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203. In addition, when performing the effect, a pattern in which the button image 90201 changes to the controller image 90203 and a pattern in which the controller image 90203 does not change and changes to the button image 90201 in the process of changing the button image 90201 in stages are executed. It may be possible. Alternatively, the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed lightly and alternately so that the change to the controller image 90203 is noticed. Also, in the case where a stepwise change is made in the controller image 90203 after the change from the button image 90201, the step before the change to the final form of the controller image 90203, for example, the “controller (small)” above. At the stage, there may be a change mode that does not change to the controller image 90203 but returns to the button image 90201, or after proceeding to the “controller (small)” stage, proceed to the “controller” stage. Good. In this case, the change of the button image 90201 to the controller image 90203 can be interesting.

  (Modification 2) Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the character combination effect, the character combination is operable between the character combination first position and the character combination second position. It may be possible to set a motion position of the third character position or higher and move between three or more positions. In addition, although only the character combination action effect and the character combination rotation effect are set as the character combination effect, other types of effects may be provided. For example, an effect may be provided in which the character object tilts, swings, expands, and deforms. Also, a plurality of characters may be integrated to form different characters. In addition, the specific effect may use a motif other than the character. For example, an effect using a gimmick imitating a plate or a rock with written characters may be used. Further, although the character combination rotation effect is executed at the character combination second position, it may be executed at a position other than the character combination second position, for example, the character combination first position.

  (Modification 3) Also, in the above embodiment, there is no so-called jackpot finalizing effect that is executed when a big win is made in a special figure game, and any character effect is executed. Although the game result may be lost, a so-called jackpot finalizing effect may be provided. For example, the special character game in which the first character role rotation effect is a big hit finalizing effect and the first character role rotation effect is executed may always be a big hit. Further, when a predetermined condition is met, a big hit confirmation effect may be obtained. For example, at the time of super reach development, when the first character combination action effect is executed after the first character image 90211 is displayed, the big hit confirmation effect may be obtained.

  (Modification 4) Further, in the above embodiment, the character role effect may be developed to super reach without being executed. It may be executed. In addition, in the case of developing to super reach, in principle, the character role effect is executed, but in the case where the effect of developing to super reach is executed without executing the character role effect, a special figure is displayed. An effect that is a big hit in the game and develops into a super reach without executing the character role effect may be a big hit finalizing effect. In addition, if a character role effect is executed at the end of normal reach (during super reach development), it will always develop into super reach, but even if a character role effect is executed at the end of normal reach, it will not shift to super reach. It may be. At this time, if the character role effect is developed to super reach without being executed, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than the case where the character role effect is executed and developed to super reach. It may be lowered. Moreover, in the character role effect at the time of super reach development, in the same character role effect, the higher the determination ratio at the time of big hit (at the time of the variation pattern PA3'-3), the higher at the time of loss (at the time of the variation pattern PA2'-3) Although the determination ratio is low, other modes may be used. For example, the determination ratio at the time of loss (fluctuation pattern PA2'-3) may be higher as the determination ratio at the time of big hit (fluctuation pattern PA3'-3) is higher. 3 o'clock), the determination rate at the time of loss (at the time of the fluctuation pattern PA2′-3) may be constant.

  (Modification 5) In the above embodiment, the ratio of the button image 90201 being displayed and the operation of the push button 9031B being accepted at the time of super reach development and at the time of jackpot result notification is the type of character effect effect However, it may be different depending on the type of character role effect. For example, when the first character combination action presentation is executed, the ratio of the display of the button image 90201 and the reception of the operation of the push button 9031B is higher than when the second character combination action presentation is executed. It may be. Similarly, the acceptance of the operations of the controller image 90203 and the stick controller 9031A may be made different depending on the type of character combination effect.

  (Modification 6) Further, in the above embodiment, the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character effect effect to be executed match, but the character does not match. There may be something. For example, the second character image 90212 or the third character image 90213 may be displayed before an effect in which the first character actor 9061 operates, such as a first character actor action effect. In this case, a surprise can be given to the player, and an interest that is different from the case where the first character image 90211 is displayed can be improved. Further, when the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character character effect to be executed do not match, the expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the characters match. It may be lowered. Further, depending on the character relationship between the character image displayed on the image display device 905 and the character combination effect to be executed, a jackpot finalizing effect may be obtained. For example, the effect of executing the second character accessory action effect after the third character image is displayed may be a jackpot finalizing effect.

  (Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the display mode of the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 is constant, but the button image 90201 and the controller image 90203 may be displayed in different modes. . For example, as a button image, a button image that is larger than the normal button image 90201 shown in FIG. 45 or the like, or a character different from “CHANCE”, for example, “this” may be displayed. By displaying such a button image, the big hit expectation may be changed, for example, higher.

  (Modification 8) Further, when the controller image 90203 is displayed as the button image 90201, a sound may be emitted or explanatory characters may be displayed. For example, when the button image 90201 is displayed, a voice prompting the user to operate the push button 9031B such as “Press” or “Press the button” may be issued. In this case, for example, when the first character image 90211 or the second character image 90212 is displayed, the sound of the first character or the second character may be emitted. Moreover, you may make it generate | occur | produce the sound of another character, and another audio | voice. Also, the degree of jackpot expectation may vary depending on the presence or absence of voice. For example, the degree of jackpot expectation may be higher when there is voice than when there is no voice.

  (Modification 9) Further, in the above embodiment, even when the button image 90201 is displayed, the character role effect may not be executed, but when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is displayed. The character combination effect may always be executed. Further, the character role effect may be executed even when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is not displayed. However, when the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203 is not displayed, the character role effect is not executed. May be.

  (Modification 10) Further, in the above embodiment, when the button image 90201 is displayed at the end of normal reach (when super reach is developed), it always develops to super reach after that, but at the end of normal reach. Even if the button image 90201 is displayed, it may not be developed into super reach. Alternatively, when the button image 90201 and the character image are displayed at the end of the normal reach, the image always develops to super reach, but the button image 90201 alone may not develop to super reach. Further, when the character role effect is executed without displaying the button image 90201, even if the big hit expectation is higher than when the button image 90201 is displayed and the character role effect is executed. It may be good or low. Further, when the character combination effect is not executed, the button image 90201 without the character image may be displayed. For example, when a button operation effect other than the development of character character effect is performed, a button image 90201 without a character image is displayed, or a so-called gas effect effect in which a character effect is not executed by operating the push button 9031B is performed. The button image 90201 without the character image may be displayed without fail when the gasse effect is executed.

  (Modification 11) Further, in the above embodiment, there is a case where the character role effect is not executed even when the character image is displayed. However, when the character image is displayed, the character role effect is not displayed. It may be executed without fail. In addition, when the super reach is developed, there is a possibility that the button image 90201 may be displayed, but the controller image may be displayed to accept the operation of the stick controller. In addition, the character combination rotation effect is executed only when the big hit result is notified, but may be executed when the super reach is developed. Further, the character combination rotation effect is executed by all of the first character combination 9061 to the third character combination 9063, but only a part thereof may be executed. Further, the big hit expectation degree may vary depending on the number and type of the character combination on which the character combination effect is executed.

  (Modification 12) In the above embodiment, as the character image, one first character image 90211 to third character image 90213 is provided for each of the first character to the third character. A plurality of character images may be provided for some or all of the characters. In this case, the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on the character image to be displayed, or the execution rate of the character role effect may be different. For example, when the first character image A and the first character image B are provided as the first character image, when the first character image A is displayed, the big hit is greater than when the first character image B is displayed. The degree of expectation may be increased. Or when the 1st character image A is displayed, you may make it the ratio with which a character accessory effect is performed become higher than the time when the 1st character image B is displayed. Alternatively, when a plurality of character role effects having different jackpot expectations are provided, when the first character image A is displayed, the character having a higher jackpot expectation level than when the first character image B is displayed. You may make it the ratio by which an effect production is performed increase. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a character effect effect that is executable only when the first character image A is displayed and is not executed when the first character image B is displayed. Good.

  (Modification 13) Further, in the above embodiment, when displaying the controller image 90203 at the time of jackpot result notification, the character image is not displayed, but the character image is displayed together with the controller image 90203. Also good. Further, when displaying the character image, any one of the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 is displayed, but a plurality of the first character image 90211 to the third character image 90213 are displayed. A character image may be displayed.

  (Modification 14) When displaying the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203, when displaying a character image, the big hit expectation may be changed depending on the type of the character image to be displayed. Further, the big hit expectation degree may be changed by a combination of the character image and the button image 90201 or the controller image 90203. For example, when the second character image 90212 and the button image 90201 are displayed, the big hit expectation is lower than when the second character image 90212 and the controller image 90203 are displayed, but the third character image 90213 and the button image are displayed. When 90201 is displayed, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the third character image 90213 and the controller image 90203 are displayed.

  (Modification 15) Further, in the above embodiment, the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in a different manner depending on the type of character image displayed at the same time, but may be displayed in a similar manner. Moreover, although it is the same aspect in some character images, you may make it become a different aspect between other character images. In addition, the display mode with different effective period bars may be other than changing the color. For example, a different pattern may be given to the effective period bar, or the size of displaying the effective period bar may be changed. Specifically, the effective period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 has a floral pattern, whereas the effective period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 has a lattice pattern, The validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the character image 90211 may be larger than the validity period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212. Furthermore, the display position may be different, or the display direction may be changed. For example, the effective period bar 90202 displayed together with the first character image 90211 is displayed below the image display device 905, whereas the effective period bar 90202 displayed together with the second character image 90212 is displayed on the image display device 905. The effective period bar 90202 displayed with the second character image 90212 is displayed sideways while the effective period bar 90202 displayed with the first character image 90211 is displayed vertically. It may be displayed. Alternatively, these may be combined. For example, the effective period bar 90202 displayed with the first character image 90211 has a lattice pattern and is displayed in a vertical orientation, whereas the effective period bar 90202 displayed with the second character image 90212 has a floral pattern. It may be displayed horizontally.

  (Modification 16) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the validity period bar 90202 is constant according to the character image. However, the same character image may be different. In this case, the big hit expectation may be changed depending on the display mode of the validity period bar 90202. For example, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, the big hit expectation degree may be higher when the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red than in green. Further, the big hit expectation may be changed according to the display mode of the character image and the validity period bar 90202. For example, when the first character image 90211 is displayed, the expected value of the jackpot is higher when the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in red than when displayed in green, but the second character image 90212 is displayed. In the case where the validity period bar 90202 is displayed in green, the jackpot expectation degree may be lower when displayed in red.

  (Modification 17) Further, in the pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called customization function may be provided. The customization function here may be, for example, a function that can select a character to be the main character when the variable display game is executed. When such a customization function is provided and the player selects the first character as the main character, the first character combination effect may be easily executed. Or you may make it a big hit expectation degree become high, when the production | generation which a 1st character appears or a 1st character accessory moves is performed. Alternatively, the first character image may be easily displayed together with the second character image or the third character image. Further, when the character's voice is uttered, the first character's voice may be easily uttered.

  (Modification 18) In the above embodiment, when the variable display is started in order to notify the CPU 90120 for effect control of the variable pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the variable display time of the decorative design and the type of reach effect. In the above example, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted. However, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command as a variable before the reach, such as presence / absence of variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous”. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted as the second command. You may do it. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects a specific variable display mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command is sent. You may make it do. In addition, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the variation pattern designation command.

  (Modification 19) This invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information and that can be assigned a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and a display result of a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is derived and displayed This is a gaming machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided.

  Slot machines are not limited to those where bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, but only slot machines that set betting numbers using gaming balls as gaming values, or only credits as gaming values. It may be a full credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, but for example a plurality of types of medals and gaming balls, etc. The game value may be used together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting the number of bets using any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and when a prize is generated, Any of a plurality of types of gaming value may be paid out.

  As effects that can be executed in such a slot machine, the character role effect in the above embodiment (character role action effect and character role rotation effect), button images and controller images are displayed and operations such as push buttons and stick controllers are performed. It is only necessary to include a promotion display that promotes.

  (Modification 20) In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the predetermined effect such as the notice effect, the sound output operation in the speaker, Various effect operations including lighting operations in game effect lamps and decorative LEDs can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but based on the occurrence of winning balls enclosing gaming balls The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

  (Modification 21) A program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed and provided on a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine. It is not limited to the form, and a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device in advance may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  (Modification 22) The game execution form is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. are temporarily stored in the internal memory or the like. It is also possible to adopt a form that can be executed by this, or a form that is directly executed using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (Variation 23) In the above embodiment, “the ratio is different” means that the ratio is different due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. The concept is not limited to the concept including A: B = 100%: 0% and different ratios.

  (Modification 24) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decoration designs “1” to “8” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (Modification 25) In the above embodiment, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or by changing the update ranges of the random numbers.

  (Modification 26) In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 stores a random value determination table, and the main board 9011 determines the random value based on the random value extracted from the main board 9011 at the time of winning a start. The random number determination process is executed with reference to the table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and executes the prefetching notice effect based on the received determination result. Although shown, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the random value determination table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. The random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute a random number determination process, and may receive a determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value, determines whether or not to win a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot, and based on the random value, the main board 9011. The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in (1) may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

  (Modification 27) In the above embodiment, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on when the effect control command is received from the main board 9011 on the effect control board 9012 side. It was described as occurring. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an interrupt for receiving a presentation control command may be generated by an interrupt request using the first bit of serial communication.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 9a 1st reserved memory display part 9b 2nd reserved memory display part 13 1st starting prize port 14 2nd starting prize port 20 Special Variable winning ball equipment 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
130 Cross key 901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Frame for game machine 904A Special symbol display device 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L Speaker 908R Speaker 908R 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Audio control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A Start-up switch 9022B Start-up switch 9023 Count switch 9025A On-hold display 9025B On-hold display 9090C Hold display 90100 Microcomputer for game control 90101 ROM
90102 RAM
90103 CPU
90104 Random number circuit 90105 I / O
90110 Switch circuit 90111 Solenoid circuit 90120 Production control CPU
90121 ROM
90122 RAM
90123 Display control unit 90124 Random number circuit 90125 I / O

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume;
Brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment;
An adjustment unit capable of executing a process for performing volume adjustment based on an operation to the volume adjustment operation unit and a process for performing luminance adjustment based on an operation to the brightness adjustment operation unit;
The adjustment unit preferentially executes a process of decreasing the volume when an operation of decreasing the volume by the volume adjustment operation unit and an operation of increasing the luminance by the brightness adjustment operation unit are performed,
further,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A promotion display executing means capable of executing a promotion display that prompts the player's action;
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the detection result of the detection means,
The specific effect executing means is
At least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect can be executed,
The promotion display execution means includes
As the promotion display, it is possible to execute a first promotion display that suggests that the first specific effect is executed, and a second promotion display that suggests that the second specific effect is executed. To play. A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume;
Brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment;
An adjustment unit capable of executing a process for performing volume adjustment based on an operation to the volume adjustment operation unit and a process for performing luminance adjustment based on an operation to the brightness adjustment operation unit;
The adjusting unit preferentially executes a process of decreasing the luminance when an operation of decreasing the luminance by the luminance adjusting operation unit and an operation of increasing the volume by the volume adjusting operation unit are performed,
further,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A promotion display executing means capable of executing a promotion display that prompts the player's action;
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the detection result of the detection means,
The specific effect executing means is
At least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect can be executed,
The promotion display execution means includes
As the promotion display, it is possible to execute a first promotion display that suggests that the first specific effect is executed, and a second promotion display that suggests that the second specific effect is executed. To play.